R&S 1129.7246.03 Operating Manual Download | Manualshive

Page: 95 / 855

background image

R&S ESU

Instrument Functions

Receiver Mode

4.64

Operating Manual 1302.6163.12 - 03

4.5.7

Marker Functions – MKR Key

MKR

MARKER
1|2|3|4
MARKER
NORM | DELTA

The

MARKER 1|2|3|4

softkey selects the corresponding marker and activates it.

MARKER 1

is always the normal marker. After they have been switched on,

MARK-

ERS

2 to 4

are delta markers that refer to

MARKER 1

. These markers can be con-

verted into markers with absolute value display by means of the

MARKER NORM

DELTA

softkey. When

MARKER 1

is the active marker, pressing the

MARKER

NORM DELTA

softkey switches on an additional delta marker.

Pressing the

MARKER 1/2/3/4

softkey again switches off the selected marker.

Example:

Remote command:

CALC:MARK ON;
CALC:MARK:X <value>;
CALC:MARK:Y?
CALC:DELT ON;
CALC:DELT:MODE ABS|REL
CALC:DELT:X <value>;
CALC:DELT:X:REL?
CALC:DELT:Y?

When several traces are being displayed, the marker is set to the maximum value
(peak) of the active trace which has the lowest number (1 to 3). In case a marker is
already located there, it will be set to the frequency of the next lowest level (next
peak).

MARKER 1|2|3|4
MARKER NORM | DELTA

[

PRESET

]

R&S ESU is set to the default setting.

[

MKR

]

On calling the menu,

MARKER 1

is switched on

('1' highlighted in the softkey) and positioned on
the maximum value of the trace. It is a normal
marker and the

MARKER NORMAL

softkey is

highlighted.

[

MARKER 2

]

MARKER 2

is switched on ('2' highlighted in the

softkey). It is automatically defined as a delta
marker on switching on so the

DELTA

is high-

lighted on softkey

MARKER NORM | DELTA

. The

frequency and level of

MARKER 2

with reference

to

MARKER 1

are output in the marker info field.

[

MARKER NORM | DELTA

] The

MARKER NORM | DELTA

softkey is high-

lighted.

MARKER 2

becomes a normal marker.

The frequency and level of

MARKER 2

are output

as absolute values in the marker info field.

[

MARKER 2

]

MARKER 2

is switched off.

MARKER 1

is the

active marker for entry. The frequency and level
of

MARKER 1

are output in the marker info field.

«
...
93
94
95
96
97
...
»

Summary of Contents for 1129.7246.03

Page 1: ...R S ESU EMI Test Receiver Operating Manual 1302 6163 12 03 Test Measurement Operating Manual ...

Page 2: ...8994 02 R S FSP B10 1129 7246 03 2009 Rohde Schwarz GmbH Co KG 81671 Munich Germany Printed in Germany Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R S is a registered trademark of Rohde Schwarz GmbH Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R S ESU is abbreviated as R S ESU ...

Page 3: ...f the product The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation and within its performance limits see data sheet documentation the following safety instructions Using the product requires technical skills and a basic knowledge of English It is therefore essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the...

Page 4: ...he positions specified by the manufacturer without the product s ventilation being obstructed If the manufacturer s specifications are not observed this can result in electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or death Applicable local or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work performed 1 Unless otherwise specified the following r...

Page 5: ...at it is in proper operating condition By taking appropriate safety measures and carefully laying the power cable you can ensure that the cable will not be damaged and that no one can be hurt by for example tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock 6 The product may be operated only from TN TT supply networks fused with max 16 A higher fuse only after consulting with the Rohde Schwarz...

Page 6: ... damage may occur It is the responsibility of the employer operator to select suitable personnel for operating the products 2 Before you move or transport the product read and observe the section titled Transport 3 As with all industrially manufactured goods the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction allergens such as nickel cannot be generally excluded If you develop an allergic react...

Page 7: ... sunlight must be avoided Keep cells and batteries clean and dry Clean soiled connectors using a dry clean cloth 3 Cells or batteries must not be short circuited Cells or batteries must not be stored in a box or in a drawer where they can short circuit each other or where they can be short circuited by other conductive materials Cells and batteries must not be removed from their original packaging...

Page 8: ... regulations must be observed Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the product documentation The improper disposal of hazardous substances or fuels can cause health problems and lead to environmental damage Informaciones elementales de seguridad Es imprescindible leer y observar las siguientes instrucciones e informaciones de seguridad El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde Schwarz c...

Page 9: ...s imprescindible leer detalladamente y comprender por completo las siguientes informaciones de seguridad antes de usar el producto y respetarlas durante el uso del producto Deberán tenerse en cuenta todas las demás informaciones de seguridad como p ej las referentes a la protección de personas que encontrarán en el capítulo correspondiente de la documentación del producto y que también son de obli...

Page 10: ...por el fabricante respecto a los estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento sin que se obstruya la ventilación Si no se siguen las indicaciones del fabricante pueden producirse choques eléctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte En todos los trabajos deberán ser tenidas en cuenta las normas nacionales y locales de seguridad del trabajo y de prevención de acci...

Page 11: ...red eléctrica Si los productos sin interruptor están integrados en bastidores o instalaciones se deberá colocar el interruptor en el nivel de la instalación 5 No utilice nunca el producto si está dañado el cable de conexión a red Compruebe regularmente el correcto estado de los cables de conexión a red Asegúrese mediante las medidas de protección y de instalación adecuadas de que el cable de conex...

Page 12: ...o ya se hayan producido condensaciones sobre el producto o en el interior de éste como p ej al desplazarlo de un lugar frío a otro caliente La entrada de agua aumenta el riesgo de choque eléctrico 18 Antes de la limpieza desconecte por completo el producto de la alimentación de tensión p ej red de alimentación o batería Realice la limpieza de los aparatos con un paño suave que no se deshilache No ...

Page 13: ...hwarz Si se reponen partes con importancia para los aspectos de seguridad p ej el enchufe los transformadores o los fusibles solamente podrán ser sustituidos por partes originales Después de cada cambio de partes relevantes para la seguridad deberá realizarse un control de seguridad control a primera vista control del conductor de protección medición de resistencia de aislamiento medición de la co...

Page 14: ...s personales o daños en el producto siga las instrucciones de seguridad del fabricante del medio de transporte o elevación utilizado 3 Si se utiliza el producto dentro de un vehículo recae de manera exclusiva en el conductor la responsabilidad de conducir el vehículo de manera segura y adecuada El fabricante no asumirá ninguna responsabilidad por accidentes o colisiones No utilice nunca el product...

Page 15: ... only be disposed of at a Rohde Schwarz service center or at a suitable depot Normas de Seguridad para Baterías Según BattV Este equipo lleva una batería que contiene sustancias per judiciales que no se debe desechar en los contenedores de basura domésticos Después de la vida útil la batería sólo se podrá eliminar en un centro de servicio de Rohde Schwarz o en un depósito apropiado Consignes de sé...

Page 16: ...ance with EN 50419 Once the lifetime of a product has ended this product must not be disposed of in the standard domestic refuse Even disposal via the municipal collection points for waste electrical and electronic equipment is not permitted Rohde Schwarz GmbH Co KG has developed a disposal concept for the environmental friendly disposal or recycling of waste material and fully assumes its obligat...

Page 17: ... management system is certified according to standards such as ISO9001 and ISO14001 Environmental commitment Energy efficient products J J Continuous improvement in J J environmental sustainability ISO14001 certified environmental J J management system Cher client Vous avez choisi d acheter un pro duit Rohde Schwarz Vous disposez donc d un produit fabriqué d après les méthodes les plus avancées Le...

Page 18: ...roximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electrical equipment for use within defined voltage limits 2006 95 EC relating to electromagnetic compatibility 2004 108 EC Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards EN 61010 1 2001 EN 61326 1 2006 EN 61326 2 1 2006 EN 55011 2007 A2 2007 Klasse B EN 61000 3 2 2006 EN 61000 3 3 1995 A1 2001 A2 2005 For the assessment of e...

Page 19: ...nd an e mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish We will take care that you will get the right information USA Canada Monday to Friday except US public holidays 8 00 AM 8 00 PM Eastern Standard Time EST Tel from USA 888 test rsa 888 837 8772 opt 2 From outside USA 1 410 910 7800 opt 2 Fax 1 410 910 7801 E mail CustomerSupport rohde schwarz com East Asia Monday to F...

Page 20: ...bH Graf Zeppelin Straße 18 D 51147 Köln GEDIS GmbH Sophienblatt 100 D 24114 Kiel HAMEG Instruments GmbH Industriestraße 6 D 63533 Mainhausen Locations Worldwide Please refer to our homepage www rohde schwarz com Sales Locations Service Locations National Websites Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 121 64 info rs rohde schwarz com Phone 49 83 31 1 08 0 49 83 31 1 08 1124 info rsmb rohde schwarz co...

Page 21: ...ls R S ESU8 20 Hz to 8 GHz R S ESU26 20 Hz to 26 5GHz R S ESU40 20 Hz to 40 GHz Options described in the base unit manuals R S FSP B2 Preselector implemented R S FSP B3 Audio Demodulator implemented R S FSU B4 OCXO reference oscillator R S FSU B9 Tracking Generator R S FSP B10 External Generator Control R S FSU B12 Attenuator for Tracking Generator R S FSP B16 LAN Interface implemented R S ESU B18...

Page 22: ...apter 1 Putting into Operation see Quick Start Guide chapters 1 and 2 Chapter 2 Getting Started see Quick Start Guide chapter 5 Chapter 3 Manual Operation see Quick Start Guide chapter 4 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions forms a reference for manual operation of the R S ESU and con tains a description of all instrument functions and their application Chapter 5 Remote Control Basics describes the basi...

Page 23: ...to date infor mation on the R S ESU The current operating manual at a time is available as printable PDF file in the download area Also provided for download are firmware updates including the associated release notes instrument drivers current data sheets and application notes Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems...

Page 24: ... of the European Union on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electrical equipment for use within defined voltage limits 2006 95 EC relating to electromagnetic compatibility 2004 108 EC Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards EN 61010 1 2001 EN 55011 1998 A1 1999 A2 2002 Class B EN 61326 1997 A1 1998 A2 2001 A3 2003 For the assessment of electroma...

Page 25: ......

Page 26: ...Operating Manual 1302 6163 12 03 1 1 R S ESU Putting into Operation 1 Putting into Operation For details refer to the Quick Start Guide chapter 1 Front and Rear Panel and chapter 2 Preparing for Use ...

Page 27: ...R S ESU Putting into Operation 1 2 Operating Manual 1302 6163 12 03 ...

Page 28: ...Operating Manual 1302 6163 12 03 2 1 R S ESU Getting Started 2 Getting Started For details refer to the Quick Start Guide chapter 1 Basic Measurement Examples ...

Page 29: ...R S ESU Getting Started 2 2 Operating Manual 1302 6163 12 03 ...

Page 30: ...Operating Manual 1302 6163 12 03 3 1 R S ESU Manual Operation 3 Manual Operation For details refer to the Quick Start Guide chapter 4 Basic Operation ...

Page 31: ...R S ESU Manual Operation 3 2 Operating Manual 1302 6163 12 03 ...

Page 32: ...ent 4 46 4 5 5 Frequency Scan and Time Domain Scan SWEEP Key 4 51 4 5 5 1Stepped Scan in the Frequency Domain 4 51 4 5 5 2Time Domain Scan in the Frequency Domain 4 52 4 5 5 3Scan on a Fixed Frequency in the Time Domain 4 53 4 5 5 4Display of Measurement Results 4 54 4 5 5 5Entry of Scan Data 4 55 4 5 5 6Running a Scan 4 62 4 5 6 Triggering the Scan TRIG Key 4 63 4 5 7 Marker Functions MKR Key 4 6...

Page 33: ...ivating the Markers 4 153 4 8 11 2Measurement of Noise Density 4 153 4 8 11 3Phase Noise Measurement 4 154 4 8 11 4Measurement of the Filter or Signal Bandwidth 4 157 4 8 11 5Measurement of a Peak List 4 158 4 8 11 6AF Demodulation 4 160 4 8 11 7Selecting the Trace 4 161 4 8 12 Change of Settings via Markers MKR Key 4 162 4 8 13 Power Measurements MEAS Key 4 169 4 8 13 1Power Measurement in Time D...

Page 34: ... 4 10 1 Tracking Generator Settings 4 319 4 10 2 Transmission Measurement 4 321 4 10 2 1Calibration of Transmission Measurement 4 321 4 10 2 2Normalization 4 323 4 10 3 Reflection Measurement 4 326 4 10 3 1Calibration of Reflection Measurement 4 327 4 10 4 Calibration Mechanism 4 327 4 10 5 Frequency Converting Measurements 4 329 4 10 6 External Modulation of the Tracking Generator 4 330 4 10 7 Po...

Page 35: ...4 354 4 13 1 1Windows Environment 4 354 4 13 1 2UNIX Environment 4 355 4 14 RSIB Interface Functions 4 356 4 14 1 Overview of Interface Functions 4 356 4 14 1 1Variables ibsta iberr ibcntl 4 357 4 14 1 2Description of Interface Functions 4 358 4 14 2 Programming via the RSIB Protocol 4 365 4 14 2 1Visual Basic 4 365 4 14 2 2Visual Basic for Applications Winword and Excel 4 368 4 14 2 3C C 4 369 4 ...

Page 36: ...e on page 4 95 6 Setting the measurement parameters in analyzer mode Analyzer Mode on page 4 102 7 Basic functions for general settings printout and data management Setup of Limit Lines and Display Lines LINES Key on page 4 240 Configuration of Screen Display DISP Key on page 4 252 Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration SETUP Key on page 4 260 Saving and Recalling Data Sets FILE Key on page ...

Page 37: ... 297 and PRESET ANALYZER on page 4 297 Pressing the PRESET key causes the R S ESU to enter its initial state according to one of the following tables The settings are selected in a way that the RF input is always protected against overload provided that the applied signal levels are in the allowed range for the instrument The initial instrument state set by the PRESET key can be adapted to arbitra...

Page 38: ...COARSE RF attenuation auto 10 dB minimum Level range 100 dB log Level unit dBµV Sweep time auto 2 5 ms Resolution bandwidth Bargraph 120 kHz 6 dB IF bandwidth 10 kHz FFT filters off Sweep cont Trigger free run Trace 1 clr write autopeak Cal correction on Noise source off Input RF 1 AC coupled Display Split screen Tracking generator only with option R S FSP B9 off External generator 1 2 only with o...

Page 39: ... auto Resolution bandwidth auto 3 MHz Video bandwidth auto 10 MHz FFT filters off Span RBW 50 RBW VBW 0 33 Sweep cont Trigger free run Trace 1 clr write Trace 2 3 blank Detector auto peak Trace math off Frequency offset 0 Hz Reference level offset 0 dB Reference level position 100 Grid abs Cal correction on Noise source off Input RF 1 AC coupled Display Full screen active screen A Tracking generat...

Page 40: ... 1 RECEIVER The RECEIVER hotkey sets the R S ESU in the test receiver mode Remote command INST SEL REC INST NSEL 6 IF The IF hotkey activates the IF analysis mode Remote command INST IFAN APD The APD hotkey activates the CISPR weighting function for measuring the Ampli tude Probability Distribution APD of a disturbance signal Remote command INST SEL APD MORE The MORE hotkey switches to side hotkey...

Page 41: ...ayed is the main menu of the current mode Inserting the measurement diagrams The blanked diagrams traces and display fields are inserted Generating the message OPERATION COMPLETE If at the time of pressing the LOCAL softkey the synchronization mechanism via OPC OPC or WAI is active the currently running measurement procedure is aborted and synchronization is achieved by setting the corresponding b...

Page 42: ...PEAK LIST CONTINUOUS BARGRAPH SINGLE BARGRAPH DETECTOR MAX PEAK MIN PEAK QUASIPEAK AVERAGE CISPR AVERAGE RMS CISPR RMS CISPR RBW UNCOUPLED MEAS TIME DEMOD DEMOD ON OFF AM FM SQUELCH THRESHOLD SCAN THRESHOLD ON OFF EDIT PEAK LIST NO OF PEAKS NB BB DISCR MARGIN FINAL MEAS TIME AUTOMATIC FINAL INTER ACTIVE RUN SCAN Side menu ESH2 Z5 ESH3 Z5 ENV 4200 ENV 216 OFF PRESCAN PHASES FINAL PHASES RUN SCAN FI...

Page 43: ...enu for setting the receiver parameters PEAKS SUBRANGES MARGIN FINAL MEAS TIME AUTOMATIC FINAL INTER ACTIVE RUN FINAL MEAS Side menu ESH2 Z5 ESH3 Z5 ENV 4200 ENV 216 OFF PRESCAN PHASES FINAL PHASES RUN FINAL MEAS RUN PRE SCAN FINAL HOLD SCAN STOP SCAN RUN SCAN HOLD SCAN STOP SCAN Side menu RECEIVER FREQUENCY ADD TO PEAK LIST CONTINUOUS BARGRAPH SINGLE BARGRAPH ...

Page 44: ... hotkey and the MEAS hotkey directly open the RECEIVER menu For a detailed description refer to Selection of the Measurement Function MEAS Key on page 4 25 The R S ESU is fitted with a preselection with switchable preselection Preselection is always switched on in receiver mode RECEIVER FREQUENCY Operation on a Discrete Frequency FREQ Key on page 4 14 or Selection of the Mea surement Function MEAS...

Page 45: ...ftkey is also available in the RECEIVER MEAS menu Remote command FREQ CENT 300 MHz STEPSIZE The STEPSIZE softkey opens a submenu for setting the step size of the receive fre quency The step size can be coupled to the set frequency or be manually set to a fixed value The softkeys of the submenu are mutually exclusive selection switches Only one switch can be activated at any one time AUTO COARSE If...

Page 46: ... stroke of the STEP key Remote command START The START softkey opens a window where the start frequency of the scan diagram can be entered The permissible value range for the start frequency is fmin fstart fmax 10 Hz fstart start frequency fmax maximum frequency Remote command FREQ STAR 20 MHz STOP The STOP softkey opens a window where the stop frequency of the scan diagram can be entered Remote c...

Page 47: ...requency range is available as option R S ESU B24 Switching on the preamplifier reduces the total mark figure of the R S ESU and thus improves the sensitivity The disadvantage of a poorer large signal immunity intermodulation is reduced by the connected preselector The signal level of the subsequent mixer is 20 dB higher so that the maximum input level is reduced by the gain of the preamplifier Th...

Page 48: ...of a reduced large signal immunity intermodulation is decreased by the connected pre selector The standard preamplifier follows the preselection filters so that the risk of overdriving by strong out of band signals is reduced to a minimum With option R S ESU B24 the frequency range of the preamplifier is extended to the upper frequency limit of the instrument The frequency range up to 3 6 GHz is c...

Page 49: ...ly either This avoids 0 dB being switched on inadvertently particularly when DUTs with high RFI voltage are mea sured Remote command INP ATT PROT ON OFF AUTO RANGE ON OFF The AUTO RANGE ON OFF softkey switches the autorange function on and off Remote command INP ATT AUTO ON OFF AUTOPREAMP ON OFF The AUTOPREAMP ON OFF softkey switches the auto preamp function and or off Remote command INP GAIN AUTO...

Page 50: ...he display of results in units relative to the bandwidth These units are derived from the logarithmic units dBµV dBµV m dBµA and dBµA m Switching over is possible also if a transducer fixes the unit to be used Conversion to 1 MHz is via the pulse bandwidth of the selected resolution bandwidth Bimp according to the following equation example for dBµV with P display level other combinations are not ...

Page 51: ...splay range for the scan diagram The display ranges go from 10 to 200 dB in 10 dB steps Invalid entries are rounded off to the nearest valid value Remote command DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG DISP WIND TRAC Y 120DB GRID MIN LEVEL The GRID MIN LEVEL softkey activates the entry of the minimum level of the dis play range Allowed values are 200 GRID MIN LEVEL 200 dB GRID RANGE Remote command DISP WIND TRA...

Page 52: ...lution bandwidth RES BW for the receiver RES BW The RES BW softkey activates the manual entry mode for the resolution bandwidth For filter type NORMAL 3dB the bandwidth can be set from 10 Hz to 10 MHz in steps of 1 2 3 5 10 For filter type EMI 6dB the 6 dB bandwidth 10 Hz 100 Hz 200 Hz 1kHz 9 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 120 kHz and 1 MHz can be set Softkeys are only available for the CISPR bandwidths 200 H...

Page 53: ...Remote command BAND 1 MHz 200 Hz The 200 Hz softkey sets the CISPR bandwidth 200 Hz Remote command BAND 200 Hz 9 kHz The 9 kHz softkey sets the CISPR bandwidth 9 kHz Remote command BAND 9 kHz 120 kHz The 120 kHz softkey sets the CISPR bandwidth 120 kHz Remote command BAND 120 kHz 1 MHz The 1 MHz softkey sets the 6 dB bandwidth 1 MHz Remote command BAND 1 MHz CISPR RBW UNCOUPLED The CISPR RBW UNCOU...

Page 54: ... implemented by Gaussian filters with the set 6 dB bandwidth and correspond approximately to the pulse bandwidth For bandwidths up to 1 MHz digital bandpass filters are used Remote command BAND TYPE PULS CHANNEL steep edged channel filters Remote command BAND TYPE CFIL RRC Root Raised Cosine filters Remote command BAND TYPE RRC 4 5 3 1 List of Available Channel Filters The channel filters listed i...

Page 55: ... channels AM Radio 10 12 5 14 15 16 18 20 21 24 3 25 30 50 kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz α 0 35 kHz kHz kHz α 0 35 kHz kHz kHz CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter RRC CFILter CFILter RRC CFILter CFILter CFILter CDMAone ETS300 113 20 kHz channels ETS300 113 25 kHz channels TETRA PDC IS 136 CDPD CDMAone 100 150 192 200 300 500 kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter FM ...

Page 56: ...automatic softkey AUTOMATIC FINAL or in interactive mode softkey INTERACTIVE Automatic control functions for line impedance stabilization networks LISN are available in the side menu of the FINAL MEAS submenu The final measurement is started with the softkey RUN FINAL MEAS The THRESHOLD SCAN function is also used to reduce data The scan is immedi ately interrupted when a limit violation is detecte...

Page 57: ...IVE RUN SCAN Side menu ESH2 Z5 ESH3 Z5 ENV 4200 ENV 216 OFF PRESCAN PHASES FINAL PHASES RUN SCAN FINAL MEAS PEAK SEARCH EDIT PEAK LIST EDIT FREQUENCY INSERT DELETE SORT BY FREQUENCY SORT BY DELTALIMIT ASCII FILE EXPORT DECIM SEP PAGE UP PAGE DOWN NO OF PEAKS PEAKS SUBRANGES MARGIN FINAL MEAS TIME AUTOMATIC FINAL INTER ACTIVE RUN FINAL MEAS RUN FINAL MEAS STOP FINAL MEAS Side menu ...

Page 58: ...Q menu Remote command FREQ CENT 300 MHz ADD TO PEAK LIST The ADD TO PEAK LIST softkey adds the receiver frequency to the peak list see also section 4 5 4 4 Data Reduction and Peak List on page 4 33 Remote command CONTINUOUS BARGRAPH The CONTINUOUS BARGRAPH softkey selects the continuous measurement mode Remote command INIT CONT ON SINGLE BARGRAPH Pressing the SINGLE BARGRAPH softkey triggers a sin...

Page 59: ...SPR average detector activated can be switched off by the CISPR RBW UNCOUPLED softkey The rms detector yields the rms level of the samples measured The integration time corresponds to the set measurement time The CISPR rms detector supplies a weighted average When measuring the average according to CISPR 16 1 the maximum value of the linear average during the measurement time is displayed The dete...

Page 60: ...Thanks to the multiple use of detectors only one test run is needed The peak detector can be combined with any other detector since it is the fastest detector and therefore ideal for overview measurements DETECTOR The DETECTOR softkey opens a submenu to select the detector and combinations of detectors The detector type is set for the bargraph measurement and is displayed after the selection Up to...

Page 61: ... weighting rms detector according to CISPR 16 1 The IF bandwidth is automatically set to the required value according to the receiving frequency This coupling can be cancelled by the CISPR RBW UNCOU PLED softkey Remote command DET REC CRMS CISPR RBW UNCOUPLED The CISPR RBW UNCOUPLED softkey cancels the coupling of the IF bandwidth to the frequency range with activated quasipeak or CISPR average de...

Page 62: ... be long enough for at least one pulse to occur during the measurement time Average measurement With average detection selected the video voltage envelope of IF signal is averaged during the measurement time Averaging is digital i e the digitized values of the video voltage are summed up and divided by the number of samples at the end of the measurement time This corresponds to a filtering with a ...

Page 63: ...asurement times With measurement times shorter than 20 ms the detector weighting changes to average or RMS RMS measurement With RMS weighting the same applies to the measurement time as with the average measurement Quasipeak measurement With quasipeak measurements the maximum value of the weighted signal during the measurement time is displayed The relatively long time constants used with quasipea...

Page 64: ...n type FM or AM Remote command DEM AM SQUELCH The SQUELCH softkey enables the input of a level threshold below which the audi ble AF is cut off The squelch function is associated with the internal trigger function TRIGGER menu which will be switched on automatically with the squelch Squelch level and trigger level do have the same value The default setting for the squelch is off Remote command SEN...

Page 65: ...lines with the level values being independent of their frequency spectral distribution search method PEAKS For generation of subrange maxima the whole frequency range is divided into equi distant subranges A subrange maximum is determined for each subrange search method SUBRANGES Determining the level maxima irrespective of their distribution in the frequency spec trum search mode PEAKS is suitabl...

Page 66: ...or a reduced number of fre quencies of interest For this measurement each scan trace to be taken into account has to be assigned a limit line and the limit line and the limit check function have to be activated in the LIMIT LINE menu The prescan is interrupted immediately for each final measurement to be performed i e the final measurement immediately follows the prescan measurement In the case of...

Page 67: ...of a Peak List on page 4 158 NO OF PEAKS With the NO OF PEAKS softkey you can enter the number of final measurement peaks to be stored Numbers between 1 and 500 can be entered If the selected number is attained no further final measurements will be performed Remote command CALC PEAK SUBR 1 500 NB BB DISCR With the NB BB DISCR softkey you can enter the decision threshold to be used by the analyzer ...

Page 68: ...OLD SCAN state The bar graph measurement is started in the free running mode The signal can be exactly analyzed by modifying the receiver settings The actual final measurement is started the receiver settings being restored except the frequency The current frequency replaces the original one in the frequency list drifting interference sources The prescan is continued at the frequency at which it w...

Page 69: ...FINAL MEAS softkey opens the following submenu receiver mode Dependent on the selected measurement mode AUTOMATIC FINAL or INTER ACTIVE PEAK SEARCH EDIT PEAK LIST EDIT FREQUENCY INSERT DELETE SORT BY FREQUENCY SORT BY DELTALIMIT ASCII FILE EXPORT DECIM SEP PAGE UP PAGE DOWN NO OF PEAKS PEAKS SUBRANGES MARGIN FINAL MEAS TIME AUTOMATIC FINAL INTER ACTIVE RUN FINAL MEAS ESH2 Z5 ESH3 Z5 ENV 4200 ENV 2...

Page 70: ...tings via Markers MKR Key on page 4 65 Trace1 014QP EDIT PEAK LIST Prescan results FREQUENCY LEVEL dBpT 1 Average 2 Average 1 Max Peak 2 Average 1 Max Peak 2 Average 1 Max Peak 2 Average 1 Max Peak 2 Average 1 Max Peak 2 Average 2 Average 2 Average 2 Average 1 Max Peak 2 Average 1 Max Peak 2 Average 2 Average TRACE3 Trace2 014AV DELTA LIMIT dB 80 0000 MHz 89 4800 MHz 98 5200 MHz 98 5200 MHz 100 72...

Page 71: ...The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters several data sections containing the scan settings and a data section containing the results of the final measurement The data of the file header consist of three columns each separated by a semicolon parameter name numeric value base unit The data section for the trace date starts with the keyword Trace n Final n number of st...

Page 72: ... RBW 100000 Hz Range resolution bandwidth Meas Time 0 01 s Range measurement time Auto Ranging ON Auto ranging on or off for current range RF Att 20 dB Range input attenuation Auto Preamp OFF Auto Preamp on or off for current range Preamp 0 dB Range preamplifier on 20dB or off 0dB Content of file Description TRACE 1 FINAL Selected trace Trace Mode CLR WRITE Trace mode CLR WRITE AVERAGE MAX HOLD MI...

Page 73: ...RAGE x Unit Hz y Unit dBuV Final Meas Time 1 000000 s Margin 6 000000 dB Values 11 2 154000 000000 81 638535 15 638535 N GND 1 158000 000000 86 563789 7 563789 N GND 2 1018000 000000 58 689873 1 310127 N GND 2 302000 000000 63 177345 2 822655 L1 GND 2 3294000 000000 56 523022 3 476978 N GND 2 1122000 000000 53 849747 6 150253 N GND 2 10002000 000000 47 551216 12 448784 N GND 1 3390000 000000 59 76...

Page 74: ...IVE softkey selects the following sequence for the final measure ment A frequency from the frequency list is set together with the associated settings from the corresponding partial scan The marker is set on this frequency in the scan diagram The final measurement sequence switches to the Interrupted status The signal can be exactly analyzed by modifying the receiver settings CONTINUE AT HOLD star...

Page 75: ...played The HOLD FINAL MEAS softkey interrupts the automatic run of the final measure ment The CONTINUE FINAL MEAS submenu appears Sequence for AUTOMATIC FINAL With the final measurement halted all receiver settings can be modified for example for examining the signal in detail The mode of the measurement automatic or interactive can again be selected The final measurement can be started with the M...

Page 76: ... for INTER ACTIVE With the final measurement halted all receiver settings can be modified for example for examining the signal in detail The mode of the measurement automatic or interactive can be selected again The final measurement can be skipped The highest level measured can be sccepted by GET MAXHOLD The final measurement can be started with the MEASURE softkey Remote command AUTOMATIC FINAL ...

Page 77: ...e used for the final measurement can be set here for each trace i e any combination of prescan and final measurement is possible The required flexibility is thus obtained for the diverse test specifications which are covered by means of the R S ESU In the THRESHOLD SCAN mode with the NB BB DISCR function active the R S ESU automatically selects the detector to be used in the final measurement on t...

Page 78: ...e selected for the prescan Any number of settings can be selected for the final measurement m out of n All selected phase PE combinations are measured during the final measurement and the maximum value is determined The softkeys to select the V network to be controlled in the PRESCAN PHASES and in the FINAL PHASES are available either via the side menu of the FINAL MEAS submenu or via the side men...

Page 79: ...L3 N ESH2 Z5 ESH3 Z5 ENV 4200 ENV 216 OFF PRESCAN PHASES FINAL PHASES PHASE N PHASE L1 PHASE L2 PHASE L3 150 KHZ HIGHPASS PE GROUNDED PE FLOATING RUN FINAL MEAS HOLD FINAL MEAS AUTOMATIC FINAL INTER ACTIVE MEASURE STOP FINAL MEAS STOP FINAL MEAS ESH2 Z5 four line V network is controlled ESH3 Z5 two line V network is controlled ENV 4200 four line V network is controlled ENV 216 two line V network i...

Page 80: ...HASES menu are immediately output at the user port This way the menu can be used to remote control the V networks during man ual measurements For automatic phase selection with the V networks the R S ESU user interface and the V networks have to be connected via a control line Fig 4 19 Connection R S ESU with R S ESH2 Z5 for direct connection without a filter cable EZ 13 Fig 4 20 Connection R S ES...

Page 81: ...ction cable EZ 14 and EZ 6 for the two line V network ESH3 Z5 and the connection cables ES 14 and EZ 21 for the 4 line V network ENV4200 Fig 4 22 Assignment of connection cables EZ 5 6 14 and 21 with AF filters for feeding the 5 V supply and the control information for the V networks R S ESH2 Z5 R S ESH3 Z5 and R S ENV4200 into a shielded room When the R S ESU is used inside the shielded room the ...

Page 82: ...ble or FREQUENCY menu A scan table can thus be defined for each measurement task which can be stored and reloaded The required frequency range can be defined by means of two parameters which can be set via keys so that no elaborate editing has to be done in the scan table Fig 4 23 Definition of scan range Scanning is started with the RUN SCAN softkey The scan can be performed as a single scan or c...

Page 83: ... measurements Whereas in conventional EMI measurement systems only the spectrum within the IF filter can be measured during a certain measurement time of e g 100 ms in TDEMI measurement systems large parts of the spectrum at the receiver input can be measured during the same time and it depends on the dynamic range and the resolution of the A D conversion system how accurate the measurement result...

Page 84: ...te of a broad band interference You can set the measurement time to a value that is greater than or equal to the reciprocal of the pulse rate Thermostat controlled software controlled and other electrically controlled instru ments generate discontinuous interferences CISPR 14 and EN 55014 contain limit values for RFI voltage with click rate weighting in the range 0 15 MHz to 30 MHz Clicks can usua...

Page 85: ...y The measurement itself is continuous i e if the end of the graph is reached and recording starts again at the beginning of the graph the measurement keeps running internally without any inter ruption 4 5 5 4 Display of Measurement Results Full screen or split screen mode can be selected for result display In the full screen mode the result diagram covers the whole screen area In split screen mod...

Page 86: ...nd the measurement parameters that are valid for this range The scan can be performed as a single scan or continuously softkeys SINGLE SCAN and CONTINUOUS SCAN Scanning is started with the RUN SCAN softkey TDOMAIN SCAN STEPPED SCAN ADJUST AXIS INS BEFORE RANGE INS AFTER RANGE DELETE RANGE RANGES 1 5 6 10 FREQ AXIS LIN LOG 10dB MIN ON OFF RUN PRE SCAN FINAL RUN SCAN HOLD SCAN CONT AT REC FREQ CONT ...

Page 87: ...AN FINAL RUN SCAN HOLD SCAN CONT AT REC FREQ CONT AT HOLD STOP SCAN STOP SCAN The TDOMAIN SCAN softkey is only available with the R S ESU K53 option Scan Start start frequency of display range Scan Stop stop frequency of display range Step Mode selection of frequency switching mode Start Entry of start frequency Stop Entry of stop frequency Step Size Entry of step size RES BW Entry of IF bandwidth...

Page 88: ... of frequency switching mode The selection of frequency switching is different for TDOMAIN SCAN and STEPPED SCAN STEPPED SCAN Linear or logarithmic frequency switching can be selected The selected setting is valid for all scan ranges LIN linear frequency switching AUTO linear frequency switching The step width is selected automatically depending on the set resolution bandwidth so that all signals ...

Page 89: ...Entry of step size In the case of linear frequency increments step widths between 1 Hz and the maxi mum R S ESU frequency can be set When a step size greater than the scan range is entered from start to stop R S ESU performs a measurement at the start and stop frequency With logarithmic frequency increments values between 0 1 and 100 can be set with steps of 1 2 3 5 With STEP AUTO selected the ste...

Page 90: ...h subrange Remote command SCAN1 INP ATT 10dB Resolution Bandwidth Minimum Measurement Time Maximum Measurement Time 10 Hz 50 Hz 10 ms 100 s 100 Hz 500 Hz 1 ms 100 s 1 kHz 30 kHz 100 µs 100 s 50 kHz 100 µs 50 s 100 kHz 120 kHz 10 µs 30 s 200 kHz 10 µs 16 s 300 kHz 10 µs 10 s 500 kHz 10 µs 6 s 1 MHz 10 µs 3 s If 0 dB RF attenuation is used with autoranging care must be taken that the per missible si...

Page 91: ... preamplifier deactivates the standard preampli fier As of firmware version 4 43 ist is possible to activate the low noise preamplifier in combination with an active preselector Default value is OFF Remote command INP GAIN LNA STAT ON OFF ADJUST AXIS The ADJUST AXIS softkey automatically sets the limits of the diagram so that the lower limit frequency corresponds to the start frequency of range 1 ...

Page 92: ...he FRE QUENCY menu Remote command FIXED FREQUENCY The FIXED FREQUENCY softkey activates time domain analysis The overall measurement time for time domain analysis can be defined in a data entry field The range is 10 µs to 10 000 s The value entered is rounded to next inte ger that is a multiple of the measurement time of a single bar graph measurement The minimum value also depends on the set meas...

Page 93: ...s defined with points of changeover the scan automatically stops at the frequencies of the new subrange of the transducer set and the user may exchange the transducer The following message informs the user that the limit has been reached TDS Range reached CONTINUE BREAK He can continue the scan at the point of change over by confirming the message CONTINUE or he can switch off the transducer BREAK...

Page 94: ...softkey activates the free run sweep mode i e start of a scan is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started immediately FREE RUN is the default setting of R S ESU Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM VIDEO The VIDEO softkey activates triggering via the displayed voltage For the video triggering mode a level line showing the trigger threshold is displayed Using the level line the thre...

Page 95: ...ue peak of the active trace which has the lowest number 1 to 3 In case a marker is already located there it will be set to the frequency of the next lowest level next peak MARKER 1 2 3 4 MARKER NORM DELTA MKR TRACE ALL MARKER OFF PRESET R S ESU is set to the default setting MKR On calling the menu MARKER 1 is switched on 1 highlighted in the softkey and positioned on the maximum value of the trace...

Page 96: ... TRACE softkey in the MKR FCNT and MKR menu Example Three traces are presented on the screen The marker is always on Trace 1 on switching on MKR TRACE 2 The marker jumps to Trace 2 but remains on the previous frequency or time MKR TRACE 3 The marker jumps to Trace 3 Remote command CALC MARK1 TRAC 1 CALC DELT TRAC 1 ALL MARKER OFF Pressing the ALL MARKER OFF softkey switches off all marker 4 5 8 Ch...

Page 97: ...NEXT PEAK The NEXT PEAK softkey sets the active marker delta marker to the next lower peak value on the trace The search direction is defined in the NEXT MODE submenu see analyzer mode Remote command CALC MARK MAX NEXT CALC DELT MAX NEXT NEXT PEAK RIGHT The NEXT PEAK RIGHT softkey sets the active marker delta marker to the next lower peak value to the right side of the current marker position on t...

Page 98: ...re presented on the screen The marker is always on Trace 1 on switching on MKR TRACE 2 The marker jumps to Trace 2 but remains on the previous frequency or time MKR TRACE 3 The marker jumps to Trace 3 Remote command CALC MARK1 TRAC 1 CALC DELT TRAC 1 MKR STEPSIZE The MKR STEPSIZE softkey sets the step size for the receiver frequency variation to the current marker frequency and also sets step size...

Page 99: ...nimum search The softkey switches to a submenu in which the search range limits can be set in the x and y direction LEFT LIMIT RIGHT LIMIT The LEFT LIMIT and RIGHT LIMIT softkeys define the two vertical lines F1 and F2 in the frequency domain span 0 and T1 T2 in the time domain span 0 The search is performed between these lines in the frequency and time domain If only LEFT LIMIT is enabled line F1...

Page 100: ...sired trace by means of MKR TRACE softkey SELECT MARKER The SELECT MARKER softkey activates the numerical selection of the marker in the data entry field Delta marker 1 is selected by input of 0 If the marker is switched off then it is switched on and can be moved later on Remote command CALC MARK1 ON CALC MARK1 X value CALC MARK1 Y PEAK The PEAK softkey sets the active marker delta marker to the ...

Page 101: ...ency or time If more measured values than pixels are available several mea sured values are combined in one pixel The R S ESU stores up to two million measured values per trace for a frequency scan and up to two million measured values per trace for a scan on a fixed fre quency time domain in its internal memory The traces are selected using the SELECT TRACE softkey in the menu of the TRACE key Th...

Page 102: ...ing options for the selected trace In this menu the mode of representing the measured data in the frequency or time domain in the 625 pixels of the display is determined Upon start of the measure ment each trace can be displayed either completely new or based on the previous results Traces can be displayed blanked and copied SELECT TRACE CLEAR WRITE MAX HOLD VIEW BLANK SCAN COUNT DETECTOR MAX PEAK...

Page 103: ...tivates the max peak detector R S ESU saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one This is especially useful with modulated or impulsive signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each scan until all signal components are detected in a kind of enve lope Pressing the MAX HOLD softkey again clears the trace memory and restarts the max hold mode...

Page 104: ...SPR RBW UNCOUPLED Remote command DET QPE AVERAGE The AVERAGE softkey activates the average detector Remote command DET AVER RMS The RMS softkey activates the rms detector Remote command DET RMS FINAL MAX PEAK The FINAL MAX PEAK selects the max peak detector for the final measurement Remote command DET FME POS FINAL MIN PEAK The FINAL MIN PEAK selects the min peak detector for the final measurement...

Page 105: ...its constant level Pressing the MIN HOLD softkey again clears the trace memory and restarts the min hold function Remote command DISP WIND TRAC MODE MINH ASCII FILE EXPORT The ASCII FILE EXPORT softkey stores the active trace in ASCII format e g on a memory stick Remote command FORM ASC MMEM STOR TRAC 1 TRACE DAT The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters several data ...

Page 106: ... Range 1 start frequency in Hz Stop 30000000 000000 Hz Range 1 stop frequency in Hz Step 4000 000000 Hz Range 1 step size RBW 9000 000000 Hz Range 1 resolution bandwidth Meas Time 0 001000 s Range 1 measurement time Auto Ranging OFF Range 1 Auto ranging on or off RF Att 10 000000 dB Range 1 input attenuation Auto Preamp OFF Range 1 Auto Preamp on or off Preamp 0 000000 dB Range 1 preamplifier on 2...

Page 107: ...CE The COPY TRACE softkey copies the screen contents of the current trace into another trace memory The desired memory is selected by entering the number 1 2 or 3 Upon copying the contents of the selected memory are overwritten and the new contents displayed in view mode Remote command TRAC COPY TRACE1 TRACE2 File contents Description Trace 1 Selected trace Trace Mode CLR WRITE Trace mode CLR WRIT...

Page 108: ...he screen The IF spectrum analysis is a very comfortable means for exact frequency tuning of the receiver and for identification of signals and of their bandwidth The accuracy of the frequency axis corresponds to the reference used internal or external The fre quency display range span can be selected between 1 kHz and 10 MHz in steps of 1 2 and 5 With the bandwidths 10 Hz to 100 kHz in steps of 1...

Page 109: ...does switch on the 6 dB EMI resolution bandwidth filters for the bar graph measurement 3 dB or channel filters are not possible in the IF analysis mode The maximum span for the IF analysis is limited to ten times the selected resolution bandwidth for the bar graph measurement This is due to the dynamic range of the bar graph measurement The IF analysis mode is selected using the IF hotkey see also...

Page 110: ...ftkey opens a submenu to select the detector and combinations of detectors For further information refer to the descriptions in section Receiver Mode DETECTOR on page 4 29 MEAS menu MEAS TIME The MEAS TIME softkey activates the entry field for the measurement time For further information refer to the descriptions in section Receiver Mode MEAS TIME on page 4 31 MEAS menu DEMOD The DEMOD softkey cal...

Page 111: ...dwidth Remote command FREQ SPAN 1 MHz 4 6 1 Level Display and RF Input Configuration AMPT Key The AMPT key is used to set the input attenuation the preamplifier the auto range function and the display unit These functions are explained in detail in section Receiver Mode Level Display and RF Input Configuration AMPT Key on page 4 80 AMPT In addition the level display range for the IF analysis displ...

Page 112: ...tion on and off For further information refer to the descriptions in section Receiver Mode AUTO RANGE ON OFF on page 4 18 AUTOPREAMP ON OFF The AUTOPREAMP ON OFF softkey switches the auto preamp function and or off For further information refer to the descriptions in section Receiver Mode AUTO PREAMP ON OFF on page 4 18 RF INPUT 1 2 The INPUT 1 2 softkey selects RF input 1 default setting or 2 For...

Page 113: ... dB MHz on page 4 19 4 6 2 Markers and Delta Markers MKR Key The markers are used for marking points on traces reading out measurement results and for quickly selecting a display section R S ESU provides four markers All markers can be used either as markers or delta markers These functions are explained in detail in section Receiver Mode Marker Functions MKR Key on page 4 64 The marker that can b...

Page 114: ...3 4 MARKER NORM DELTA on page 4 64 ALL MARKER OFF Pressing the ALL MARKER OFF softkey switches off all marker MKR TRACE The MKR TRACE softkey places the marker on a new trace For further information refer to the descriptions in section Receiver Mode MKR TRACE on page 4 65 LINK MKR1 AND DELTA1 With the softkey LINK MKR1 AND DELTA1 the delta marker1 can be linked to marker1 so if the x axis value of...

Page 115: ...dulation MARKER DEMOD softkey On calling the menu the entry for the last active marker is activated SELECT MARKER softkey if no marker is activated marker 1 is activated and a maximum search PEAK softkey is performed The marker can be set to the desired trace by means of the MKR TRACE softkey MKR FCTN 4 6 3 1 Activating the Markers SELECT MARKER The SELECT MARKER softkey activates the numerical se...

Page 116: ... the descriptions in section Receiver Mode SELECT MARKER on page 4 66 PEAK The PEAK softkey sets the active marker or delta marker to the peak of the trace For further information refer to the descriptions in section Receiver Mode PEAK on page 4 66 CENTER MKR FREQ The CENTER MKR FREQ softkey sets the center frequency to the current marker or delta marker frequency A signal can thus be set to the c...

Page 117: ...scriptions in section Receiver Mode NEXT PEAK LEFT on page 4 66 SEARCH LIMITS The SEARCH LIMITS softkey limits the search range for maximum or minimum search The softkey switches to a submenu in which the search range limits can be set in the x and y direction LEFT LIMIT RIGHT LIMIT The LEFT LIMIT and RIGHT LIMIT softkeys define the two vertical lines F1 and F2 in the frequency domain span 0 and T...

Page 118: ...me domain span 0 Hz Remote command CALC MARK FUNC CST Example The harmonics levels of a CW carrier are to be measured at 100 MHz MIN The MIN softkey sets the active marker delta marker to the minimum of the corre sponding trace For further information refer to the descriptions in section Receiver Mode MIN on page 4 67 NEXT MIN The NEXT MIN softkey sets the active marker delta marker to the next hi...

Page 119: ...ns Valid entries are from 0 dB to 80 dB the resolution is 0 1 dB Remote command CALC MARK PEXC 10dB The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB This value is sufficient for the NEXT PEAK and NEXT MIN functions since in this mode the next lower maximum or next higher minimum will always be detected If NEXT PEAK LEFT or NEXT PEAK RIGHT is selected these functions search for the next relative ...

Page 120: ...ill not find any signal as the signal level does not decrease by more than 30 dB to either side of any signal Order of signals detected or With 20 dB peak excursion NEXT PEAK and NEXT PEAK RIGHT will also detect signal 2 as the signal level decreases at least by 29 85 dB to either side of this sig nal which is now greater than the peak excursion signal min amplitude decrease to both sides of the s...

Page 121: ...are combined in one pixel The traces are selected using the SELECT TRACE softkey in the menu of the TRACE key The traces can individually be activated for a measurement or frozen after comple tion of a measurement Traces that are not activated are blanked The display mode can be selected for each trace Traces can be overwritten in each measurement CLEAR WRITE mode averaged over several measurement...

Page 122: ...tions are subdivided as follows Display mode of trace CLEAR WRITE VIEW and BLANK Evaluation of the trace as a whole AVERAGE MAX HOLD and MIN HOLD TRACE The TRACE key opens a menu offering the setting options for the selected trace SELECT TRACE CLEAR WRITE MAX HOLD AVERAGE VIEW BLANK Side menu MIN HOLD AVG MODE LOG LIN LIN LOG POWER COPY TRACE ...

Page 123: ...max peak detector For further information refer to the descriptions in section Receiver Mode MAX HOLD on page 4 72 AVERAGE The AVERAGE softkey activates the trace averaging function The average is formed over several sweeps Depending on the setting of AVG MODE LOG LIN the logarithmic level values or the measured power voltage values are averaged Remote command DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Description ...

Page 124: ... for the log arithmic level display mode Remote command CALC MATH AVER MODE LIN With logarithmic averaging the dB values of the display voltage are averaged With linear averaging the level values in dB are converted into linear voltages or powers prior to averaging Voltage or power values are averaged or offset against each other and reconverted into level values For stationary signals the two met...

Page 125: ...r to averaging then averaged and logarithmized again for display on the screen The average value is always correctly displayed irrespective of the signal characteristic COPY TRACE The COPY TRACE softkey copies the screen contents of the current trace into another trace memory The desired memory is selected by entering the number 1 2 or 3 Upon copying the contents of the selected memory are overwri...

Page 126: ...g 4 27 Block diagram of APD measurement circuit with A D converter 1 The amplitude of the disturbance is expressed in terms of the corresponding field strength or voltage at the receiver input The method of measuring the probability of time pmeas during which the disturbance envelope exceeds a specified level Elimit is applied Usually an APD measurement is carried out at a fixed frequency Advantag...

Page 127: ... Fig 4 29 The ordinate axis of the APD function displays the probability that the disturbance envelope exceeds the disturbance level Fig 4 28 Zero Span of receiver noise Fig 4 29 APD of receiver noise If one impulse is received within 1 of time as shown in Fig 4 30 the APD shows drastic extension to the right side at the bottom of Fig 4 31 indicating a high distur bance level but at low probabilit...

Page 128: ... Fig 4 32 has a higher average value than Fig 4 30 because of the increasing pulse repetition frequency but the log average value Xavg of Fig 4 32 does not show any difference from that of Fig 4 30 This is because the log average value mainly depends on the receiver noise and strongly suppresses impulsive noise in this case But the APD of the distur bance shown in Fig 4 33 has high sensitivity to ...

Page 129: ...ual 1302 6163 12 03 Fig 4 32 Zero span of a pulsed signal high PRF Fig 4 33 APD of a pulsed signal high PRF For the disturbance which has high peak and average value such as in Fig 4 36 the APD curve shows high probability at high level as shown in Fig 4 35 ...

Page 130: ...ndwidth VBW of the spectrum analyzer according to CISPR 16 1 1 for measurements above 1 GHz 2 Find the frequencies at which high disturbances are observed This can be accomplished by using the maximum hold function during a specified amount of time e g 2 min in the frequency span of interest Peak detection shall be used when applying this procedure 3 Determine the frequencies for the APD measureme...

Page 131: ...t The EUT complies if pmeas is less than or equal to plimit at all frequencies 10 Or read the levels Emeas for a given probability plimit 11 Compare Emeas against the limit Elimit The EUT complies if Emeas is less than or equal to E Fig 4 36 Compliance test using the APD method cases A and B are failing case C is passing Specification The following specifications described in 1 shall be applied to...

Page 132: ...imit corresponding to a specified limit level Elimit As peak and average weighted limits are already specified in CISPR 11 it is recommended to use the existing peak limit together with an APD limit point The EUT is deemed to be compliant if the measured values are less than both limits The problem is how to determine the APD limit point Elimit plimit This can be done in accordance with 1 as follo...

Page 133: ...isplay window The frequency axis can be defined either by the start and stop frequency or by the center frequency and bwthe span SPAN key With two windows SPLIT SCREEN displayed at the same time the input data always refer to the window selected in the SYSTEM DISPLAY menu The softkeys in the CF STEPSIZE menu depend on the selected domain frequency domain or time domain FREQ If two displays screen ...

Page 134: ...10PCT 0 5 SPAN The 0 5 SPAN softkey sets the step size for the center frequency entry to 50 of the span Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 50PCT X SPAN The X SPAN softkey allows the factor defining the center frequency step size to be entered as of the span Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT CENTER The CENTER softkey sets the step s...

Page 135: ... FACT 20PCT CENTER The CENTER softkey sets the step size coupling to MANUAL and the step size to the value of the center frequency This function is especially useful during measure ments of the signal harmonic content because by entering the center frequency each stroke of the STEP key selects the center frequency of another harmonic Remote command MARKER The MARKER softkey sets the step size coup...

Page 136: ...of the search bandwidth around the center frequency the center frequency is not varied until a signal is in the search bandwidth above the level threshold This can be achieved by manually modifying the center frequency for example On switching on the softkey is highlighted and the search bandwidth and the thresh old value are marked on the diagram by two vertical lines and one horizontal line All ...

Page 137: ...s the window for manually entering the fre quency span The center frequency is kept constant Allowed range of span values for the time domain span 0 0 Hz and for the frequency domain span 0 minspan fspan fmax Remote command FREQ SPAN 2GHz SWEEPTIME MANUAL The SWEEPTIME MANUAL softkey activates the window for entering the sweep time manually with Span 0 Hz The softkey is not available for Span 0 Hz...

Page 138: ...op frequency start frequency is below 1 4 Remote command DISP WIND 1 2 TRAC X SPAC LIN 4 8 3 Level Display Setting and RF Input Configuration AMPT Key The AMPT key is used to set the reference level the maximum level and the display range of the active window as well as the input impedance and the input attenuation of the RF input The AMPT key opens a menu for setting the reference level and the i...

Page 139: ...ling When linear scaling is selected the scaling is first activated see also RANGE LINEAR dB softkey Remote command DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LIN RANGE LINEAR The RANGE LINEAR softkey selects linear scaling in for the level display range i e the horizontal lines are labelled in The grid is divided in decadic steps Markers are displayed in the selected unit delta markers are displayed in refer enced to...

Page 140: ... integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the refer ence level will be adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached will be out put RF ATTEN MANUAL is the default setting Remote command INP ATT 40 DB RF ATTEN AUTO The RF ATTEN AUTO softkey sets the RF attenuation automatically as a function of the selected reference level This ensures that the o...

Page 141: ... of the level axis GRID ABS is the default setting For setting RANGE LINEAR linear scaling labelling of axes in the softkey is not displayed since the unit itself implies a relative scale Remote command DISP WIND TRAC Y MODE ABS RF INPUT 50 Ohm 75 Ohm The RF INPUT 50 Ω 75 Ω softkey switches the input impedance of the instrument between 50 Ω default setting and 75 Ω The setting 75 Ω should be used ...

Page 142: ...or the bandwidths between 1 Hz and 30 kHz When working with bandwidths up to 30 kHz the FFT algorithm offers considerably higher measurement speeds with all the other settings remaining the same The reason is that with analog filters the sweep time required for a particular span is proportional to Span RBW2 When using the FFT algorithm however the sweep time is proportional to Span RBW The video b...

Page 143: ... bandwidth When FFT filters are used the lower limit of the bandwidth is 1 Hz FFT filters may be used with bandwidths up to 30 kHz For numeric inputs the values are always rounded to the nearest possible band width For rotary knob or UP DOWN key inputs the bandwidth is adjusted in steps either upwards or downwards RES BW MANUAL VIDEO BW MANUAL SWEEPTIME MANUAL RES BW AUTO VIDEO BW AUTO SWEEPTIME A...

Page 144: ...ta entry for the sweep time At the same time the coupling of the sweep time is cancelled Other couplings VIDEO BW RES BW remain effective In the frequency domain span 0 Hz and for resolution bandwidths above 1 kHz the allowed sweep times for spans 3 2 kHz range from 2 5 ms through to 16000 s With spans below 3 2 kHz the maximum allowed sweep time is reduced to 5 s span Hz If FFT filters are used t...

Page 145: ...e coupling ratio is set in the COUPLING RATIO submenu The coupling of the video bandwidth to the resolution filter is also permitted for the time domain display span 0 Remote command BAND VID AUTO ON SWEEPTIME AUTO The SWEEPTIME AUTO softkey couples the sweep time to the span video band width VBW and resolution bandwidth RBW The sweep time is automatically adjusted on any change in span resolution...

Page 146: ...solution bandwidth This is the default setting for the coupling ratio resolution bandwidth video band width This is the coupling ratio recommended if sinusoidal signals are to be measured Remote command BAND VID RAT 3 This setting is only effective for the VBW AUTO selection in the main menu RBW VBW PULSE 0 1 The RBW VBW PULSE 0 1 softkey sets the following coupling ratio video bandwidth 10 resolu...

Page 147: ...effective for the RBW AUTO selection in the main menu SPAN RBW MANUAL The SPAN RBW MANUAL softkey activates the manual input of the coupling ratio The span resolution bandwidth ratio can be set in the range 1 to 10000 Remote command BAND RAT 0 1 This setting is only effective for the RBW AUTO selection in the main menu DEFAULT COUPLING The DEFAULT COUPLING softkey sets all coupled functions to the...

Page 148: ...ow serves as a window in the time domain so that high amplitude precision with good selection is achieved Compared to bandpasses FFT filters lead to significantly reduced sweep times For a span of 50 kHz and a bandwidth of 100 Hz for instance the sweep time is reduced from 5 s to 40 ms FFT filters are particularly suitable for stationary signals sinusoidal signals or signals that are continuously ...

Page 149: ...or filters of type RRC Root Raised Cosine the filter bandwidth indicated describes the sampling rate of the filter For all other filters CFILter the filter bandwidth is the 3 dB bandwidth Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 100 Hz 200 Hz 300 Hz 500 Hz CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter A0 1 kHz 3 kHz 3 4 kHz 4 kHz 7 5 kHz 8 5 kHz CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter DAB Satellite ETS3...

Page 150: ...s With LINear the falling signal edge will be flatter than with LOGarithmic This is due to the conversion from linear power to logarithmic level units a reduction of the linear power by 50 reduces the logarithmic signal level by only 3 dB This is important for EMI measurements above 1 GHz Below 1 GHz CISPR 16 1 1 defines the linear average detector only Above 1 GHz both the linear and the loga rit...

Page 151: ...d for the active window only The CONTINUOUS SWEEP SINGLE SWEEP and SGL SWEEP DISP OFF soft keys are mutually exclusive selection keys SWEEP CONTINUOUS SWEEP The CONTINUOUS SWEEP softkey activates the continuous sweep mode which means that the sweep takes place continuously according to the trigger mode set When working in the split screen mode and with different settings in the two win dows screen...

Page 152: ...ted sweeps Remote command INIT CONM SWEEPTIME MANUAL The SWEEPTIME MANUAL softkey activates the window for entering the sweep time manually see also BW menu Remote command SWE TIME 10s SWEEPTIME AUTO The SWEEPTIME AUTO softkey activates the automatic selection of the sweep time as a function of the bandwidth of the resolution and video filters see also BW menu Remote command SWE TIME AUTO ON SWEEP...

Page 153: ...menu for selection of the various trigger sources trigger polarity and external gate function The active trigger mode is indicated by highlight ing the corresponding softkey For video trigger a trigger threshold can be entered which is represented in the dia gram as a horizontal line To indicate that a trigger mode other than FREE RUN has been set the enhance ment label TRG is displayed on the scr...

Page 154: ...s triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the measurement channel For this purpose the R S ESU uses a level detector at the second intermediate fre quency The detector threshold can be selected in a range between 30 dBm and 10 dBm at the input mixer The resulting trigger level at the RF input is calculated via the following formula For this purpose the R S ESU uses a level dete...

Page 155: ...the trigger signal The selected setting is highlighted The selection is valid for all trigger modes with the exception of FREE RUN in the gate mode it also applies to the gate polarity The default setting is POLARITY POS Remote command TRIG SLOP POS By using a gate in sweep mode and stopping the measurement while the gate signal is inactive the spectrum for pulsed RF carriers can be displayed with...

Page 156: ...R softkey The setting of the mode takes place in the GATE SETTINGS submenu GATED TRIGGER The GATED TRIGGER softkey switches the sweep mode with gate on and off When gate is switched on a gate signal applied to the rear panel connector EXT TRIGGER GATE or the internal IF power detector controls the sweep of the R S ESU This selection is made via the EXTERN and IF POWER softkeys for trig ger and gat...

Page 157: ...p the enhancement label GAT is dis played on the screen This label appears to the right of the window for which the gate is configured Remote command SWE EGAT ON SWE EGAT SOUR IFP or SWE EGAT SOUR EXT GATE SETTINGS The GATE SETTINGS softkey calls a submenu for making all the settings required for gated sweep operation At the same time a transition is made to the time domain span 0 and the time par...

Page 158: ...menu Remote command SWE EGAT POL POS GATE DELAY The GATE DELAY softkey activates the window for setting the delay time between the gate signal and the continuation of the sweep This may be useful for taking into account a delay between the gate signal and the stabilization of an RF carrier for example As gate delay values between 125 ns and 100 s may be set The position of the delay on the time ax...

Page 159: ...d gate length GL can be adjusted to the burst signal by entering numeric values or by means of the rotary knob FREQ 802 MHz Level 0 dBm Return Digital Mod Select GMSK Select Source Select PRBS Select Return Level Attenuation Select 60 dB Return KEY Menu called by this key All information between the brackets refers to this menu Number Numeric value to be entered for the parameter on hand SOFTKEY S...

Page 160: ...han pixels are available several measured val ues are combined in one pixel The traces are selected using the SELECT TRACE softkey in the menu of the TRACE key The traces can individually be activated for a measurement or frozen after comple tion of a measurement Traces that are not activated are blanked The display mode can be selected for each trace Traces can be overwritten in each measurement ...

Page 161: ...ither completely new or based on the previous results Traces can be displayed blanked and copied Traces can also be corrected with the aid of mathematical functions The measurement detector for the individual display modes can be selected directly by the user or set automatically by R S ESU The default setting is trace 1 in the overwrite mode CLEAR WRITE the other traces 2 and 3 are switched off B...

Page 162: ...ious one The detector is automatically set to MAX PEAK The maximum value of a signal can thus be determined over several sweeps This is especially useful with modulated or impulsive signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of enve lope Pressing the MAX HOLD softkey again clears the trace memory and restarts the max hold mode Remote...

Page 163: ...akes place over the selected number of sweeps In this case the displayed trace is determined during averaging according to the following formula where n is the number of the current sweep n 2 SWEEP COUNT No averag ing is carried out for the first sweep but the measured value is stored in the trace memory With increasing n the displayed trace is increasingly smoothed since there are more single swe...

Page 164: ...eans no averaging maxhold or minhold is carried out Sweep Count 1 means averaging over the selected number of sweeps in the continuous sweep mode averaging is performed until the set number of sweeps is attained and is then continued as running averaging The default setting is running averaging Sweep Count 0 The number of sweeps used for averaging is the same for all active traces in the selected ...

Page 165: ...ime the difference calculation is switched between linear and logarith mic in submenu TRACE MATH Remote command CALC MATH MODE LIN LOG POWER With logarithmic averaging the dB values of the display voltage are averaged or substracted from each other with trace mathematical functions With linear averag ing the level values in dB are converted into linear voltages or powers prior to aver aging Voltag...

Page 166: ...e file header consist of three columns each separated by a semicolon parameter name numeric value base unit The data section starts with the key word Trace n n number of stored trace followed by the measured data in one or several columns depending on measurement which are also separated by a semicolon This format can be read in from spreadsheet calculation programs e g MS Excel It is necessary to...

Page 167: ...00 Hz Start stop of the display range Unit Hz for span 0 s for span 0 dBm dB for statistics measurements Ref Level 30 dBm Reference level Level Offset 0 dB Level offset Ref Position 75 Position of reference level referred to diagram limits 0 lower edge y Axis LOG Scaling of y axis linear LIN or logarithmic LOG Level Range 100 dB Display range in y direction Unit dB with x axis LOG with x axis LIN ...

Page 168: ... are implemented as pure digital devices The following detectors are available Peak detectors MAX PEAK and MIN PEAK on page 4 138 Auto peak detector on page 4 138 Sample detector on page 4 138 RMS detector on page 4 138 Average detector on page 4 139 Quasipeak detector on page 4 139 CISPR RMS detector on page 4 139 CISPR average detector on page 4 139 File contents Description Trace 1 Selected tra...

Page 169: ...played test point and display it as a single measured value The maximum and minimum levels within a frequency point are connected by a ver tical line Sample detector The SAMPLE detector routes through the sampled data without any further evalua tion and either displays them directly or for reasons of speed in case of short sweep times first writes them into a memory and processes them subsequently...

Page 170: ...ayed The detector is used for example to measure pulsed sinusoidal signals with a low pulse repetition frequency It is calibrated with the RMS value of an unmodulated sinusoidal signal Averaging is with lowpass fil ters of the 2nd order simulation of a mechanical instrument The CISPR RMS detector is available in zero span CISPR average detector The CISPR average detector supplies a weighted averag...

Page 171: ...mum detector for the set display mode of the trace Clear Write Max Hold and Min Hold and the selected filter mode bandpass FFT The detector activated for the specific trace is identified in the respective trace dis play field as follows Remote command DET AUTO ON DETECTOR AUTO PEAK The DETECTOR AUTOPEAK softkey activates the autopeak detector Remote command DET APE AUTO SELECT DETECTOR AUTO PEAK D...

Page 172: ...ep of a pixel The sweep time thus determines the number of averaged values and with increasing sweep time better averaging is obtained The rms detector is thus an alternative for averaging over several sweeps see TRACE AVERAGE Since the video bandwidth must be at least 10 times the resolution bandwidth RBW to ensure that video filtering does not invalidate the rms values of the signal this ratio i...

Page 173: ...icate that the trace has been obtained by subtraction the difference 1 2 or 1 3 is indicated on the trace info of trace 1 and in the TRACE main menu the TRACE MATH softkey is highlighted Remote command CALC MATH TRACE1 TRACE2 CALC MATH TRACE1 TRACE3 TRACE POSITION The TRACE POSITION softkey activates the entry of the trace position for 0 differ ence The position is stated in of the diagram height ...

Page 174: ... softkey starts the recording of correction data of the instrument If the correction data recording has failed or if the correction values are deactivated CAL CORR OFF softkey UNCAL is displayed in the status field Remote command CAL CAL ABORT The CAL ABORT softkey interrupts the recording of correction data and restores the last complete correction data set Remote command CAL ABOR CAL CORR ON OFF...

Page 175: ...f last record of correction values overall results of correction value record list of found correction values according to function module The results have the following meaning Remote command CAL RES The YIG CORR ON OFF softkey is available only on models with a frequency range 3 GHz and 40 GHz If the instrument is operated in a temperature controlled environment the cyclic frequency drift correc...

Page 176: ...f marker display Temporary markers are used in addition to the markers and delta markers to evalu ate the measurement results They disappear when the associated function is deac tivated The measurement results of the active marker also called marker values are dis played in the marker field The marker info field at the upper right of the display shows the marker location here frequency the level a...

Page 177: ...e menu MKR TRACE LINK MKR1 AND DELTA1 CNT RESOL Side menu STEPSIZE STANDARD STEPSIZE SWP POINTS MKR FILE EXPORT DECIM SEP PRESET R S ESU is set to the default setting MKR On calling the menu MARKER 1 is switched on 1 highlighted in the softkey and positioned on the maximum value of the trace It is a normal marker and the MARKER NORMAL softkey is high lighted MARKER 2 MARKER 2 is switched on 2 high...

Page 178: ...ously irrespective of the set span the frequency counter delivers a more exact result than a measurement performed with a marker This is due to the follow ing The marker measures only the position of the pixel on the trace and infers the frequency of the signal from this value The trace however contains only a limited number of pixels Depending upon the selected span each pixel may contain many me...

Page 179: ...o determine manually a reference point with level and frequency time or x axis level to define a level offset or deactivate the reference point The REFERENCE FIXED function is useful for the measurement of the harmonic suppression at small span fundamental not represented REF FXD ON OFF The REF FXD ON OFF softkey switches on or off the relative measurement to a fixed reference value REFERENCE POIN...

Page 180: ...indow The following sweep is stopped at the position of the reference marker The fre quency of the signal is counted and the measured frequency becomes the new cen ter frequency The zoomed display range is then configured and the new settings are used by R S ESU for further measurements As long as switching to the new frequency display range has not yet taken place pressing the softkey will abort ...

Page 181: ...n in the same window The function of this softkey is identical to that of the MKR TRACE softkey in the MKR menu see MKR TRACE on page 4 164 Example Three traces are presented on the screen The marker is always on trace 1 when switching on Remote command CALC MARK1 TRAC 1 CALC DELT TRAC 1 LINK MKR1 AND DELTA1 With the softkey LINK MKR1 AND DELTA1 the delta marker 1 can be linked to marker 1 so if t...

Page 182: ... SWP POINTS softkeys controls the knob increment decrement of the marker position and uses the available sweep points configured in the SWEEP menu Remote command CALC MARK X SSIZ POIN MKR FILE EXPORT The MKR FILE EXPORT softkey saves the data of all active markers of the window to a specified file The format of the decimal point is defined by the DECIM SEP soft key Remote command MMEM STOR MARK C ...

Page 183: ...he entry for the last active marker is activated SELECT MARKER softkey if no marker is activated marker 1 is activated and a maximum search PEAK softkey is performed The marker can be set to the desired trace by means of MKR TRACE softkey MKR FCTN SELECT MARKER PEAK NOISE MEAS PHASE NOISE PH NOISE ON OFF REF POINT LEVEL REF POINT LVL OFFSET REF POINT FREQUENCY PEAK SEARCH AUTO PEAK SEARCH N DB DOW...

Page 184: ...a logarithmic ampli tude units dBm dBmV dBmµV dBµA the noise power density is output in dBm Hz i e as level in 1 Hz bandwidth with reference to 1 mW With linear amplitude units V A Ω the noise voltage density is evaluated in µV Hz the noise current density in µA Hz or the noise power density in µW Hz The following settings have to be made to ensure that the power density measure ment yields correc...

Page 185: ...MARK FUNC NOIS ON CALC MARK FUNC NOIS RES Example Measurement of inherent R S ESU noise 4 8 11 3 Phase Noise Measurement PHASE NOISE The PHASE NOISE softkey switches the PHASE NOISE function on off Addition ally the softkey opens the submenu for manually setting the reference point The phase noise measurement can be switched off in the submenu PRESET The R S ESU is set to default setting MARKER Ma...

Page 186: ...s referred to 1 Hz bandwidth The sample detector is automatically used and the video bandwidth set to 0 1 times the resolution bandwidth RBW The two settings are taken into account in the correction values used for the noise power measurement To obtain stable results two pixels on the right and the left of the respective delta marker position are taken for the measurement The procedure for determi...

Page 187: ...on This level offset is set to 0 dB on when the REFERENCE FIXED or PHASE NOISE function is enabled Remote command CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y OFFS 10dB REF POINT FREQUENCY The REF POINT FREQUENCY softkey activates an entry box for the manual input of a reference frequency for the REFERENCE FIXED or PHASE NOISE function Remote command CALC DELT1 FUNC FIX RPO X 10 7MHz PEAK SEARCH The PEAK SEARCH sets ...

Page 188: ... STAT ON To query the result pulse width Remote command CALC MARK1 FUNC NDBD RES To query the two marker x values in seconds separated by comma Remote command CALC MARK1 FUNC NDBD TIME Span 0 Further remote commands Remote command CALC MARK1 FUNC NDBD 3dB CALC MARK1 FUNC NDBD FREQ Span 0 PRESET The R S ESU is set to the default setting CENTER 100 MHz The center frequency is set to 100 MHz SPAN 2 M...

Page 189: ... MKR TRACE softkey in the main menu is used to select the trace for searching peak values In single sweep mode opening the list performs a single search at the end of the sweep The NEW SEARCH softkey triggers a new sweep determines the peak val ues of the trace at the end of the sweep and enters them in the list In continuous sweep mode the peak search on the current trace starts as soon as the sw...

Page 190: ...RIGHT LIMIT The LEFT LIMIT and RIGHT LIMIT softkeys define the vertical lines F1 F2 in the fre quency domain span 0 and T1 T2 in the time domain span 0 between which the search is carried out If only one line is active the F1 T1 line is used as the lower limit the upper limit is the stop frequency If F2 T2 is also active it defines the upper limit Remote command CALC MARK X SLIM LEFT 1MHZ CALC MAR...

Page 191: ...ch the demodulation mode and the duration of the demodulation can be selected Remote command CALC MARK1 FUNC DEM ON MKR DEMOD ON OFF The MKR DEMOD ON OFF softkey switches the demodulation on off In the frequency range span 0 the frequency scan is stopped at the frequency of the active marker with demodulation switched on provided that the level is above the threshold line and the signal is demodul...

Page 192: ...the continuous demodulation in the fre quency domain If the sweep time is long enough the set frequency range can be monitored acoustically Remote command CALC MARK1 FUNC DEM CONT ON 4 8 11 7 Selecting the Trace MKR TRACE The MKR TRACE softkey sets the active marker to different traces Only those traces can be selected which are visible on the screen in the same window The function of the softkey ...

Page 193: ... the numerical selection of the marker in the data entry field Delta marker 1 is selected by input of 0 Remote command CALC MARK1 ON CALC MARK1 X value CALC MARK1 Y PEAK The PEAK softkey sets the active marker delta marker to the peak of the trace If no marker is active when MKR menu is called MARKER 1 is automatically switched on and the peak search is performed Remote command CALC MARK MAX CALC ...

Page 194: ...n detail NEXT PEAK The NEXT PEAK softkey sets the active marker delta marker to the next lower max imum of the selected trace Remote command CALC MARK MAX NEXT CALC DELT MAX NEXT PRESET R S ESU is set to the default setting MKR MARKER 1 is switched on and automatically jumps to the largest signal of the trace CENTER MKR FREQ The center frequency is set to the marker frequency The span is adapted i...

Page 195: ...cy and time domain If only LEFT LIMIT is enabled line F1 T1 is the lower limit and the upper limit corre sponds to the stop frequency If RIGHT LIMIT is also enabled it determines the upper limit Remote command CALC MARK X SLIM LEFT 1MHZ CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 10MHZ CALC MARK X SLIM ON THRESHOLD The THRESHOLD softkey defines the threshold line The threshold line represents a limit for the level rang...

Page 196: ... next higher minimum right of the current marker position on the selected trace Remote command CALC MARK MIN RIGH CALC DELT MIN RIGH NEXT MIN LEFT The NEXT MIN LEFT softkey sets the active marker delta marker to the next higher minimum left of the current marker position on the selected trace Remote command CALC MARK MIN LEFT CALC DELT MIN LEFT PRESET R S ESU is set to the default setting CENTER 1...

Page 197: ...ion irrespective of the current signal amplitude Relative maximum is understood to mean a decrease of the signal amplitude by a defined value i e the peak excursion right and left of the amplitude peak The 6 dB level change set as a default value may be attained already by the inher ent noise of the instrument In such a case the R S ESU would identify noise peaks as maxima or minima The value ente...

Page 198: ...t find any signal as the signal level does not decrease by more than 30 dB to either side of any signal Order of signals detected or With 20 dB peak excursion NEXT PEAK and NEXT PEAK RIGHT will also detect signal 2 as the signal level decreases at least by 29 85 dB to either side of this sig nal which is now greater than the peak excursion signal min amplitude decrease to both sides of the signal ...

Page 199: ...ce under test to keep track of the current peak marker position and level The current marker search limit settings LEFT LIMIT RIGHT LIMIT THRESHOLD EXCLUDE LO are taken into account Remote command CALC MARK MAX AUTO ON OFF CALC MARK MIN AUTO ON OFF PEAK Signal 1 NEXT PEAK Signal 2 NEXT PEAK Signal 2 no further signal detected PEAK Signal 1 NEXT PEAK LEFT Signal 1 no further signal detected NEXT PE...

Page 200: ...ntain a defined percentage of the power and the power dissipation allowed in the adjacent channels Additionally the menu contains functions to determine the modulation depth of AM modulated signals and to measure the 3rd order intercept point The measurements and the corresponding settings are selected in the MEAS menu MEAS The MEAS key opens the menu to select and set the power measurement The fo...

Page 201: ... field The measured values are updated after each sweep or averaged over a user defined number of sweeps AVERAGE ON OFF and NUMBER OF SWEEPS in order to determine e g the mean power over several bursts For determination of the peak value MAX HOLD ON the maximum value from several sweeps is dis played Example Marker info field for MEAN selected AVERAGE ON and MAX HOLD ON If both the on and off phas...

Page 202: ...RES PEAK The PEAK softkey switches on the calculation of the peak value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment thereof For the maximum peak the largest peak value obtained since the activation of MAX HOLD ON is displayed With AVERAGE ON the peak values of a trace are averaged over several sweeps and displayed The number of sweeps over which the average or the maximum value is calculat...

Page 203: ...points from the mean value and outputs them as measured value The measurement of the mean power is automatically switched on at the same time For the maximum peak the largest standard deviation obtained since the activation of MAX HOLD ON is displayed With AVERAGE ON the standard deviations of a trace are averaged over several sweeps and displayed The number of sweeps over which the average or the...

Page 204: ...ve power measurement The reference value for the relative power is defined by SET REFERENCE The value 0 dBm is used if the reference value is not defined Remote command CALC MARK FUNC SUMM MODE ABS MAX HOLD ON OFF The MAX HOLD ON OFF softkey switches the display of the maximum peak obtained from measurements at successive sweeps on and off The displayed maximum peak is only updated at the end of a...

Page 205: ...d is then continued as running averaging Calculation of the maximum peak MAX HOLD is performed continuously irrespective of the selected number of sweeps NUMBER OF SWEEPS 0 Continuous averaging is carried out over 10 measured values NUMBER OF SWEEPS 1 No averaging maxhold or minhold is carried out NUMBER OF SWEEPS 1 Averaging is carried out over the set number of measured values This setting is eq...

Page 206: ...is divided into subspectra This is done by means of a bandwidth which is small compared to the channel band width These subspectra are then combined by integration of the trace pixels With the IBW method the transmission channels or adjacent channels are marked by vertical lines at a distance of half the channel bandwidth to the left and to the right of the corresponding channel center frequency s...

Page 207: ...ent ADJ channel settings with one single measurement at the same time Example ACP Measurement A and Measurement B are using identical TX channel settings Channel Bandwidth The ADJ settings for Measurement A and measurement B are different It is now possible to do both measurements at the same time Configure the ACP measurement with number of ADJ channels 2 Define ADJ settings bandwidth spacing as ...

Page 208: ...method Fig 4 10 Screen display of adjacent channel power measurement using the time domain method Limit values for the adjacent channel power can be defined for the measurement If limit checking is switched on a pass fail information indicating that the power has been exceeded is displayed during the measurement in the table in the lower half of the screen ...

Page 209: ...CP ACP ON OFF CP ACP STANDARD CP ACP CONFIG NO OF ADJ CHAN NO OF TX CHAN CHANNEL BANDWIDTH CHANNEL SPACING ACP REF SETTINGS CP ACP ABS REL CHAN PWR HZ POWER MODE CLEAR WRITE MAX HOLD ADJUST SETTINGS Side menu ACP LIMIT CHECK EDIT ACP LIMITS WEIGHTING FILTER WEIGHT TX ON OFF WEIGHT TX ALPHA WEIGHT ADJ ON OFF WEIGHT ADJ ALPHA ADJ REFLVL OFFSET SELECT TRACE SET CP REFERENCE SWEEP TIME NOISE CORR ON O...

Page 210: ... relative values referenced to the power of a transmission channel The default set ting is relative value measurement see CP ACP ABS REL softkey When multi carrier ACP measurement is activated the number of test points is increased to ensure that adjacent channel powers are measured with adequate accuracy Remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL CPOW ACP MCAC CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CPOW ACP MCAC CALC...

Page 211: ...imum close to the reference level without forcing an overload message The default setting is CP ACP STANDARD NONE CDMA2000 DS CDMA2000 MC1 CDMA2000 MC3 TD SCDMA WLAN 802 11a WLAN 802 11b WIMAX WIBRO USER NADC IS136 TETRA PDC PHS CDPD For the R S ESU the channel spacing is defined as the distance between the center frequency of the adjacent channel and the center frequency of the transmis sion chan...

Page 212: ...oftkey SWEEP TIME MANUAL in the BW menu Remote command SWE TIME value NOISE CORR ON OFF If the NOISE CORR ON OFF softkey is activated the results will be corrected by the instrument s inherent noise which increases the dynamic range When the function is switched on a reference measurement of the instrument s inherent noise is carried out The noise power measured is then subtracted from the power i...

Page 213: ...time is to be increased to 200 ms Remote command SENS POW HSP ON DIAGRAM FULL SIZE The DIAGRAM FULL SIZE softkey switches the diagram to full screen size Remote command DISP WIND1 SIZE LARG SMAL ADJUST REF LVL The ADJUST REF LVL softkey adjusts the reference level of the R S ESU to the measured channel power This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally...

Page 214: ...RBW as a function of the channel bandwidth RBW 1 40 of channel bandwidth The maximum possible resolution bandwidth with respect to the requirement RBW 1 40 resulting from the available RBW steps 1 3 is selected Video bandwidth VBW For a correct power measurement the video signal must not be limited in band width A restricted bandwidth of the logarithmic video signal would cause signal averaging an...

Page 215: ...struments harddisk in XML file format Softkey SAVE AS USER STD opens a dialog box to store the user defined configu ration The following list shows the parameters that you can customize Number of Adjacent Channels Channel Bandwidth of TX ADJ and ALT channels Channel Spacings Resolution Bandwidth Video Bandwidth ACP Limit State and ACP Limits Sweeptime Sweeptime Coupling Detector Trace Mode Clr Wri...

Page 216: ...NO OF ADJ CHAN softkey activates the entry of the number n of adjacent channels to be considered in the adjacent channel power measurement Numbers from 0 to 12 can be entered The following measurements are performed depending on the number of the chan nels NO OF ADJ CHAN NO OF TX CHAN CHANNEL BANDWIDTH CHANNEL SPACING ACP REF SETTINGS CP ACP ABS REL CHAN PWR HZ POWER MODE CLEAR WRITE MAX HOLD ADJU...

Page 217: ...hs for the transmission channels and the adjacent channels The transmission channel bandwidth is normally defined by the transmission stan dard The correct bandwidth is set automatically for the selected standard see CP ACP STANDARD softkey 3 The channel power the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel the power of the next higher and lower channel alternate channel 1 and of the next but on...

Page 218: ...ed in case of equal adjacent channel bandwidths The same holds true for the ALT2 channels alternate channels 2 when the bandwidth of the ALT1 channel alternate channel 1 is entered Remote command SENS POW ACH BWID CHAN 14kHz SENS POW ACH BWID ACH 1kHz SENS POW ACH BWID ALT1 14kHz SENS POW ACH BWID ALT2 14kHz CHANNEL SPACING The CHANNEL SPACING softkey opens a table for defining the channel spacing...

Page 219: ...r the entry of the adjacent channel spacing ADJ causes channel spacing ALT1 to be set to twice and channel spacing ALT2 to three times the adjacent channel spacing and so on Thus only one value needs to be entered in case of equal channel spacing The same holds true for the ALT2 channels when the bandwidth of the ALT1 chan nel is entered Remote command SENS POW ACH SPAC CHAN 20kHz SENS POW ACH SPA...

Page 220: ...ed as a reference channel MAX POWER TX CHANNEL The transmission channel with the highest power is used as a reference channel LOWEST HIGHEST CHANNEL The outer left hand transmission channel is the reference channel for the lower adjacent channels the outer right hand transmission channel that for the upper adjacent chan nels A C P R E F E R E N C E C H A N N E L T X C H A N N E L 1 T X C H A N N E...

Page 221: ...mum algorithm The higher value is remained MAX HOLD mode is only applicable if the number of adjacend channels is 0 Remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW MODE WRIT MAXH CP ACP ABS The absolute power in the transmission channel and in the adjacent channels is displayed in the unit of the y axis e g in dBm dBmV CP ACP REL For adjacent channel power measurements NO OF ADJ CHAN 0 the level of the adjacent...

Page 222: ...the transmission channel spacing the adjacent channel spacing and the bandwidth of one of adjacent channels ADJ ALT1 or ALT2 whichever is furthest away from the transmission channels No of transmission channels 1 transmission channel spacing 2 adjacent channel spacing adjacent channel bandwidth measurement margin The measurement margin is approx 10 of the value obtained by adding the channel spaci...

Page 223: ...or relative levels If both limits are active and if the higher of both limit values is exceeded the measured value is marked accordingly Remote command CALC LIM ACP ON CALC LIM ACP ACH 0dB 0dB CALC LIM ACP ACH STAT ON CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 10dBm 10dBm CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS STAT ON CALC LIM ACP ALT1 0dB 0dB CALC LIM ACP ALT1 STAT ON CALC LIM ACP ALT1 ABS 10dBm 10dBm CALC LIM ACP ALT1 ABS STAT ON CALC...

Page 224: ... the TX channel Remote command POW ACH FILT ALPH ALL 0 3 POW ACH FILT ALPH CHAN 0 3 WEIGHT ADJ ON OFF Activates and deactivates the weigthing filter for adjacent and alternate channels Note that most of the standards require identical settings for all channels Remote command POW ACH FILT STAT ACH OFF POW ACH FILT STAT ALT ON WEIGHT ADJ ALPHA Defines the roll off factor of the weighting filter for ...

Page 225: ... MHz AMPT 0 dBm Set the reference level to 0 dBm MEAS Call the menu for the measurement functions CHAN PWR ACP Select the channel and adjacent channel power measure ment function The measurement is performed with the default settings or a previously defined setting The sub menu for setting the desired new configuration is opened CP ACP STANDARD select IS136 ENTER Select the NADC IS136 standard CP ...

Page 226: ...are mea sured CHANNEL BANDWIDTH 1 23 MHz Ud 30 kHz Set the channel bandwidth to 1 23 MHz in accordance with IS 95 Set the adjacent channel bandwidth to 30 kHz Upon entry of 30 kHz for the adjacent channel the alter nate channels are also set to 30 kHz CHAN SPACING 1 25 MHz Ud 885 kHz Ud 1 98 MHz Ud 2 97 MHz Open the list for entering the channel spacings Upon entry of 885 kHz for the adjacent chan...

Page 227: ...e channel only CHANNEL BANDWIDTH 1 23 MHz Set the channel bandwidth to 1 23 MHz in line with IS95 ADJUST SETTINGS Set the optimum span 5 MHz resolution bandwidth RBW 30 kHz video bandwidth VBW 300 kHz and detector RMS for the measurement automatically The absolute channel power and the relative power of the adjacent channels and alternate channels are displayed on the screen Go to the main menu fo...

Page 228: ... temporary markers OCCUP BW ON OFF The OCCUP BW ON OFF softkey switches measurement of the occupied band width on or off Remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL OBW CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW CALC MARK FUNC POW OFF POWER BANDWIDTH The POWER BANDWIDTH softkey opens the entry of the percentage of power related to the total power in the displayed frequency range which defines the occu pied bandwidth pe...

Page 229: ...he reference level is not influenced by ADJUST SETTINGS For an optimum dynamic range it should be selected in a way that the signal maximum is close to the reference level The adjustment is carried out only once if necessary the instrument settings may be changed later Remote command SENS POW PRES OBW Measurement principle For example the bandwidth containing 99 of the signal power is to be determ...

Page 230: ... measurement functions OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH Select measurement of the occupied bandwidth and open the submenu for configuring the measurement POWER BANDWIDTH 99 Select 99 for the bandwidth to be measured CHANNEL BANDWIDTH 21 kHz Enter the channel bandwidth of 21 kHz specified by PDC ADJUST SETTINGS Optimize the measurement parameters for the specified channel bandwidth Allow for a complete frequency...

Page 231: ... transmitter two port network is depen dent on the amplitude of the peak values as well as on their probability The probability of amplitude values can be measured with the APD function Ampli tude Probability Distribution During a selectable measurement time all occurring amplitude values are assigned to an amplitude range The number of amplitude val ues in the specific ranges is counted and the r...

Page 232: ...It shows the probability of an amplitude exceeding a specific value For the APD function the x axis is scaled in absolute values in dBm whereas for the CCDF function the x axis is scaled relative to the MEAN POWER measured Definitions Crest factor peak voltage to rms CCDF complementary cumulative distribution function During an active statistic measurement the functions FULL SCREEN SPLIT SCREEN an...

Page 233: ...ence the peak amplitudes the video bandwidth is automatically set to 10 times the resolution bandwidth The sample detector is used for detecting the video voltage APD ON OFF The APD ON OFF softkey switches on or off the amplitude probability distribution function When the APD function is switched on the CCDF function is switched off automatically Remote command CALC STAT APD ON CCDF ON OFF The CCD...

Page 234: ...OF SAMPLES softkey sets the number of power measurements taken into account for the statistics Please note that the overall measurement time is influenced by the number of sam ples selected as well as by the resolution bandwidth set up for the measurement as the resolution bandwidth directly influences the sampling rate Remote command CALC STAT NSAM value SCALING The SCALING softkey opens a submen...

Page 235: ... must be at least one decade Remote command CALC STAT SCAL Y UPP value Y AXIS MIN VALUE The Y AXIS MIN VALUE softkey defines the lower limit of the displayed probability range As the y axis scaling has a logarithmic axis the distance between max and min value must be at least one decade Valid values are in the range 0 value 1 Remote command CALC STAT SCAL Y LOW value ADJUST SETTINGS The ADJUST SET...

Page 236: ... command INIT CONT OFF INIT IMM Hint for usage of the marker functions with measurement of signal statistics With the signal statistic measurement level always is displayed on x axis Y axis always is a normalized value between 0 and 1 In contrary to use of marker in fre quency or time domain marker is input in level values and the output is in percent age values Example Measurement of CCDF of a IS...

Page 237: ...0 is defined by the external trigger event and the instrument s trigger offset GATED TRIGGER activates the gating for statistics functions The trigger source is changed to EXTERN if this function is switched on Remote command SWE EGAT ON NO OF SAMPLES 10000 Set the number of measurement samples to 10000 SINGLE MEAS Start the measurement sequence At the end the resulting trace will display the CCDF...

Page 238: ...E 1 3 STAT 1 3 ON SWE EGAT TRACE 1 3 STAR 1 3 value SWE EGAT TRACE 1 3 STOP 1 3 value SWE EGAT TRACE 1 3 PER value Comment Comment string Period Period of the signal to be measured Range x Start Begin of time period to be taken into account Range x Stop End of time period to be taken into account Use Range YES NO Allows to temporarily disable a range The timing values have full numerical resolutio...

Page 239: ...arrier It is searched when the func tion is activated and is marked by means of the REFERENCE FIXED marker The noise power of the channel is subtracted from the signal level obtained C N and in the case of a C No measurement it is referred to a 1 Hz bandwidth There are two methods for measuring the carrier noise ratio 1 The carrier is outside the channel examined In this case it is sufficient to s...

Page 240: ... submenu for configuring the carrier noise ratio measurement The user can choose between measurement without C N and measurement with reference to the bandwidth C No In addition it is possible to select the bandwidth of the channel and to adapt the span C N C NO The C N and C NO softkeys enable and disable the measurement of the carrier noise ratio the C No measurement also being referred to a 1 H...

Page 241: ...s on the measurement of the AM modu lation depth An AM modulated carrier is required on the screen for ensuring correct operation The level value of MARKER 1 is taken as the carrier level When this function is acti vated MARKER 2 and MARKER 3 are automatically set symmetrically to the carrier on the adjacent peak values of the trace as delta markers and MARKER 2 is acti vated for the entry When th...

Page 242: ...termodulation product generated from one of the useful signals and the 2nd harmonic of the second useful signal in case of two tone modulation The frequencies of the intermodulation products are above and below the useful sig nals Fig 4 14 Intermodulation products PU1 and PU2 shows intermodulation prod ucts PI1 and PI2 generated by the two useful signals PU1 and PU2 PRESET The R S ESU is set to th...

Page 243: ... intermodulation sig nals and useful signals is reduced by 2 dB This is illustrated in Fig 4 15 Dependence of intermodulation level on useful signal level Fig 4 15 Dependence of intermodulation level on useful signal level The useful signals at the two port output increase proportionally with the input level as long as the two port is in the linear range A level change of 1 dB at the input causes ...

Page 244: ...he third order intercept from the level spacing between normal markers and delta markers and outputs it in the marker info field Remote command CALC MARK FUNC TOI ON CALC MARK FUNC TOI RES Example A two tone signal with frequencies of 100 MHz and 101 MHz is applied to the RF input of the R S ESU The level of the two signals is 10 dBm SELECT MARKER The SELECT MARKER softkey activates the selection ...

Page 245: ...th will be automatically adjusted RBWn RBW1 n if that RBW is not available the next higher value is used The results can be obtained via the following remote commands Trace read out via the normal trace subsystem The first harmonic frequency can be read out via the center frequency command THD value comma separated in and dB Remote command CALC MARK FUNC HARM DIST TOT Comma separated list of harmo...

Page 246: ... to 26 Remote command CALC MARK FUNC HARM NHAR numerical value HARMONIC SWEEPTIME The HARMONIC SWEEPTIME softkey allows to set the value how long the zero span measurement on each harmonic frequency shall take place This is an alias softkey to the normal sweep time of the zero span therefore the same parser com mand is to be used HARMONIC RBW AUTO The softkey HARMONIC RBW AUTO disables the resolut...

Page 247: ...or each of these ranges For this purpose the SWEEP TABLE settings or the current device settings are used Up to 20 subranges can be defined they need not directly follow one another across which the R S ESU sweeps in subsequent order However the measure ment ranges must not overlap The measurement parameters can be selected inde pendently from each other in every subrange SWEEP LIST menu EDIT SWEE...

Page 248: ...EEP MODE LIST switches the spurious list on SWEEP MODE AUTO switches the spurious list off SWEEP LIST The SWEEP LIST softkey opens a submenu where predefined sweep ranges can be edited or new ranges generated or deleted A table listing the current sweep ranges is displayed Remote command EDIT SWEEP LIST The EDIT SWEEP LIST softkey opens the table for editing the sweep ranges When a limit line is d...

Page 249: ...ated sweep time mode is automatically set to MANUAL Detector Specifies the range detector AUTO PEAK MAX PEAK MIN PEAK SAMPLE RMS AVER AGE REF Level Reference level in dBm The upper edge of the displayed screen area is the value of the maximum reference level corrected by the associated transducer factor RF Attenuator Mode AUTO MANUAL RF Attenuator Number as with Sweep Time PRE AMP ON OFF preamplif...

Page 250: ...measurement while the submenu is simultaneously exited When the measurement is started the R S ESU sets up the measurement diagram in the selected measurement window and starts the measurement in the selected mode With SINGLE a single frequency sweep occurs afterwards the R S ESU remains on the stop frequency With CONTINUOUS the measurement continues until it is stopped You can stop the measuremen...

Page 251: ...t available Remote command CALC1 PEAK AUTO ON OFF IF SHIFT Refer to the IF SHIFT softkey in the setup menu STOP MEAS See STOP MEAS on page 4 219 START MEAS See START MEAS on page 4 219 PEAK SEARCH The PEAK SEARCH softkey starts the process of determining the list of the sub range maximums from the existing sweep results This procedure can be repeated as often as desired e g to experiment with the ...

Page 252: ...able according to the entries in the FREQUENCY column in descending order Remote command SORT BY DELTA LIM The SORT BY DELTA LIM softkey sorts the table according to the entries in the DELTA LIM column default in descending order If no limit line has been specified an offset of 200 dB is assumed for all peaks Remote command ASCII FILE EXPORT The ASCII FILE EXPORT softkey stores the peak list in AS...

Page 253: ...ng mode of the device Start 9000 000000 Hz Stop 7000000000 000000 Hz Start stop of the span Unit Hz x Axis LIN Linear LIN or logarithmic LOG future feature scaling of the x axis Sweep Count 1 Selected number of sweeps File contents Explanation TRACE 1 Selected trace Trace Mode CLR WRITE Display mode of trace CLR WRITE AVERAGE MAX HOLD MIN HOLD VIEW BLANK x Unit Hz Unit of x values y Unit dBm Unit ...

Page 254: ...purious Emissions measurement a range defines a segment for which you can define the following parameters sepa rately start and stop frequency RBW VBW sweep time reference level attenuator settings and limit values Via the sweep list you define the ranges and their settings for details on settings refer to the SWEEP LIST softkey The following rules apply to ranges The minimum span of a range is 10...

Page 255: ... LTE Category A Freq 1GHz DL BW_10_0_MHz__CFhigher1GHz xml LTE Category A Freq 1GHz DL BW_10_0_MHz__CFlower1GHz xml LTE Category A Freq 1GHz DL BW_15_0_MHz__CFhigher1GHz xml LTE Category A Freq 1GHz DL BW_15_0_MHz__CFlower1GHz xml LTE Category A Freq 1GHz DL BW_20_0_MHz__CFhigher1GHz xml LTE Category A Freq 1GHz DL BW_20_0_MHz__CFlower1GHz xml LTE Category A Freq 1GHz DL D r_s instr sem_std EUTRA ...

Page 256: ...1_39 xml W CDMA 3GPP 31 39 dBm DL PowerClass_39_43 xml W CDMA 3GPP 39 43 dBm DL PowerClass_43_INF xml W CDMA 3GPP 43 INF dBm DL PowerClass_negINF_31 xml W CDMA 3GPP INF 31 dBm DL D r_s instr sem_std WCDMA 3GPP UL 3GPP_UL xml W CDMA 3GPP UL D r_s instr sem_std WIBRO DL PowerClass_29_40 xml WiBro TTA 29 40 dBm DL PowerClass_40_INF xml WiBro TTA 40 INF dBm DL PowerClass_negINF_29 xml WiBro TTA INF 29...

Page 257: ...ic_safety_band_Mask_M_10MHz xml 802 11 high power U S 4 9GHz public safety band Mask M 10MHz 802_11_highpower_US_4_9GHz_public_safety_band_Mask_M_20MHz xml 802 11 high power U S 4 9GHz public safety band Mask M 20MHz 802_11_lowpower_US_4_9GHz_public_safety_band_Mask_L_5MHz xml 802 11 low power U S 4 9GHz public safety band Mask L 5MHz 802_11_lowpower_US_4_9GHz_public_safety_band_Mask_L_10MHz xml 8...

Page 258: ...m_std WLAN 802_11p 802_11p_5MHz_US_5GHz_band_power_class_A_0dBm xml 802 11p 5MHz US 5GHz band power class A 0dBm 802_11p_5MHz_US_5GHz_band_power_class_C_20dBm xml 802 11p 5MHz US 5GHz band power class C 20dBm 802_11p_5MHz_US_5GHz_band_power_class_B_10dBm xml 802 11p 5MHz US 5GHz band power class B 10dBm 802_11p_5MHz_US_5GHz_band_power_class_D_28_8dBm xml 802 11p 5MHz US 5GHz band power class D 28 ...

Page 259: ...s on the measurement itself The other attributes and child nodes are used to display information about the Spectrum Emission Mask Standard on the measurement screen The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in Table 4 3 In the example above PowerClass_31_39 xml under D r_s instr sem_std WCDMA 3GPP these attributes are defined as follows Standard W CDMA 3GPP LinkDirection DL PowerCla...

Page 260: ...ierarchy of the XML can not be seen in the tables either view one of the default files already stored on the analyzer in the D r_s instr sem_std directory or check the structure as shown below Below a basic example of the structure of the file is shown containing all mandatory attributes and child nodes Note that the PowerClass element and the range ele ment are themselves elements of the Base For...

Page 261: ...p to twenty Range nodes Range PowerClass The Range element is structered as follows Range Index n Name Name ChannelType Channel Type Channel Type WeightingFilter Type FilterType Type RollOffFactor Factor RollOffFactor Bandwith Bandwidth Bandwidth WeightingFilter FrequencyRange Start RangeStart Start Stop RangeStop Stop FrequencyRange Limit Start Unit Unit Value Value Stop Unit Unit Value Value Lim...

Page 262: ...f the instrument No Application SA Name of the application No MinimumSweepPoints Value SweepPoints No LinkDirection Name Downlink Uplink None Yes ShortName DL UL No ReferencePower Yes Method TX Channel Power TX Channel Peak Power Yes ReferenceChannel string No Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mandatory Index 0 Only index 0 is currently supported others are ignored Yes StartPower Va...

Page 263: ... is the reference range Type RRC CFILTer Type of weighting filter Yes RollOfffactor 0 1 Excess filter bandwidth Only if filter type is RRC Bandwidth bandwidth in Hz Filter bandwidth Only if filter type is RRC FrequencyRange Yes Start frequency in Hz Start value of the range Yes Stop frequency in Hz Stop value of the range Yes Limit A Range must contain exactly two limit nodes one of the limit node...

Page 264: ... Parameter Description Mandatory File Content Description RefType CPOWER TxBandwidth 9540000M Hz FilterState ON Alpha 0 22 PeaksPerRange 1 Values 4 0 22500000 9270000 1000000 2986455000 74 762840270996094 10 576210021972656 45 762840270996094 PASS 1 9270000 4770000 100000 2991405000 100 17695617675781 35 990325927734375 1 490325927734375 PASS 3 4770000 9270000 100000 3005445000 100 17695617675781 ...

Page 265: ...er a preset the sweep list contains a set of default ranges and parameters For each range you can change the parameters listed below To insert or delete ranges use the INS BEFORE RANGE INS AFTER RANGE and DELETE RANGE softkeys SPEC EM ON OFF SWEEP LIST EDIT SWEEP LIST INS BEFORE RANGE INS AFTER RANGE DELETE RANGE NEXT RANGES PREVIOUS RANGES REFERENCE RANGE POW REF CHAN PEAK TX BANDWIDTH RRC FILT O...

Page 266: ...lter bandwidth not applicable for Channel and RRC filters Remote command ESP RANG1 BAND VID 5000000 TX BANDWIDTH RRC FILT ON OFF ALPHA BT START MEAS STOP MEAS SWEEP LIST RANGE 1 RANGE 2 Ref RANGE 3 RANGE 4 RANGE 5 Range Start 250 MHz 2 52 MHz 2 52 MHz Range Stop 2 52 MHz 2 52 MHz 250 MHz Filter Type NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL RBW 30 kHz 30 kHz 30 kHz VBW 10 MHz 10 MHz 10 MHz Sweep Time Mode AUTO AUTO AU...

Page 267: ...and ESP RANG1 RLEV 0 RF Attenuator Mode AUTO MANUAL Remote command ESP RANG1 INP ATT AUTO ON RF Attenuator Shows the current RF attenuation The R S ESU automatically calculates the RF attenuation if AUTO mode is selected and displays the corresponding value in this field If the field is edited the RF Attenuator mode is automatically set to MANUAL Remote command ESP RANG1 INP ATT 10 PRE AMP Remote ...

Page 268: ...ote command ESP RANG1 LIM ABS STAR 10 Abs Limit Stop Sets the absolute limit value at the stop frequency of the range The unit depends on the unit selected via the UNIT softkey Remote command ESP RANG1 LIM ABS STOP 20 Rel Limit Start Sets the relative limit value at the start frequency of the range The unit is dBc Remote command ESP RANG1 LIM REL STAR 20 Rel Limit Stop Sets the relative limit valu...

Page 269: ...thin the reference range Chan Measures the channel power within the reference range integral bandwidth method Remote command ESP RTYP PEAK TX BANDWIDTH Defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power Possible values are from 20 Hz to the span of the reference range Remote command ESP BWID 20 HZ RRC FILT ON OFF Activates or deactivates the RRC filter Remote command ESP FILT RRC STAT ON A...

Page 270: ...heck color and an asterisk indicate a failed limit check The trace limit line result of the limit check and the channel power of the reference range are displayed in full screen too if the LIST EVALUATION is inactive Remote command CALC ESP PSE AUTO ON MARGIN Opens an edit dialog box to enter the margin used for the limit check peak search LOAD STANDARD Opens a dialog box to select a customized st...

Page 271: ... this name and can be examined in the table LIMIT LINES The domain in which the limit line is to be used Here a distinction is made between the time domain span 0 Hz analyzer mode only and the frequency domain span 0 Hz The reference of the interpolation points to the x axis The limit line may be specified either for absolute frequencies or times or for frequencies which are related to the set cen...

Page 272: ...s not possible to check automati cally whether the marked level values have been underranged or exceeded 4 9 1 1 Selection of Limit Lines LINES The LINES key opens the menu for fixing the limit lines and the display lines SELECT LIMIT LINE EDIT LIMIT LINE NEW LIMIT LINE NAME VALUES INSERT VALUE DELETE VALUE SHIFT X LIMIT LINE SHIFT Y LIMIT LINE SAVE LIMIT LINE COPY LIMIT LINE DELETE LIMIT LINE X O...

Page 273: ... respectively The horizontal and vertical lines of the DISPLAY LINES submenu mark individual levels or frequencies span 0 or times span 0 in the diagram The SELECTED LIMIT LINE table provides information about the characteristics of the marked limit line The characteristics of the limit line are set in the EDIT LIMIT LINE NEW LIMIT LINE submenu Name name Domain frequency or time Unit vertical scal...

Page 274: ...layed Remote command CALC LIM3 NAME GSM1 CALC LIM3 UPP STAT ON CALC LIM4 LOW STAT ON Limit Check Activate automatic limit violation check analyzer mode only When LIMIT CHECK ON is activated a GO NOGO test is performed in the active screen In the center of the diagram a display window appears which indicates the results of the limit check test The following example shows two active limit lines A ch...

Page 275: ...the marked limit line and saves it under a new name In this way a new limit line can be easily generated by parallel translation or editing of an existing limit line The name can be arbitrarily chosen and input via an entry window max of 8 characters Remote command CALC LIM3 COPY 2 or CALC LIM3 COPY GSM2 DELETE LIMIT LINE The DELETE LIMIT LINE softkey erases the selected limit line Before deletion...

Page 276: ...the vertical unit the interpolation the vertical scaling the vertical threshold only with relative vertical scaling the margin the definition of the limit line as either upper or lower limit the data points for frequency time and level At the time of entry the R S ESU immediately checks that all limit lines are in accor dance with certain guidelines These guidelines must be observed if specified o...

Page 277: ...20 to 10 20 or 99 9 to 999 9 for the linear amplitude scales EDIT LIMIT LINE NEW LIMIT LINE The EDIT LIMIT LINE and NEW LIMIT LINE softkeys both call the EDIT LIMIT LINE submenu used for editing limit lines In the table heading the characteristics of the limit line can be entered The data points for frequency time and level values are entered in the columns NAME VALUES INSERT VALUE DELETE VALUE SH...

Page 278: ... can either be scaled in absolute frequency or time or relative units In receiver mode only absolute scaling is used Any of the unit keys may be used to toggle between ABSOLUTE and RELATIVE the cursor must be positioned in the X Scaling or the Y Scaling line The RELATIVE scaling is always suitable if masks for bursts are to be defined in the time domain or if masks for modulated signals are requir...

Page 279: ...When the limit line is defined as an upper limit the margin means that the level is below the limit line When the limit line is defined as a lower limit the margin means that the level is above the limit line The default setting is 0 dB i e no margin Remote command CALC LIM3 UPP MARG 10dB CALC LIM3 LOW MARG 10dB Threshold Selection of the threshold value with relative Y scaling With relative Y sca...

Page 280: ...here a new data point may be entered However during the entry of new values it is necessary to observe an ascending order for frequency time Remote command DELETE VALUE The DELETE VALUE softkey erases the data point complete line at the cursor position All succeeding data points are shifted down accordingly Remote command SHIFT X LIMIT LINE The SHIFT X LIMIT LINE softkey calls an entry window wher...

Page 281: ...nes across the entire width of a diagram and can be shifted in y direction The frequency or time lines are continuous vertical lines across the entire height of the diagram and can be shifted in x direction The DISPLAY LINES submenu for activating and setting the display lines appears different depending on the display mode set in the active measurement window fre quency or time domain If the spec...

Page 282: ... position of the lines The level lines mark the selected level in the measurement window Remote command CALC DLIN STAT ON CALC DLIN 20dBm FREQUENCY LINE 1 FREQUENCY LINE 2 The FREQUENCY LINE 1 2 softkeys enable or disable the frequency lines 1 2 and allow the user to enter the position of the lines The frequency lines mark the selected frequencies in the measurement window Remote command CALC FLIN...

Page 283: ...lie in different frequency ranges However specific settings of the two windows reference level center frequency can be coupled if required so that with CENTER B MARKER A for example the shift of the marker in diagram A causes the frequency range zoomed in some cases to be shifted along diagram B In the default setting the upper half of the screen shows the bar graph measure ment of the receiver sc...

Page 284: ...med by means of the corre sponding key in the hotkey bar for details refer to Mode Selection Hotkey Bar on page 4 9 It should be noted that the measurements in the FULL SCREEN mode are per formed only in the visible active window FULL SCREEN SPLIT SCREEN PARAM COUPLING COUPLING TABLE DEFAULT CONFIG ENABLE ALL ITEMS DISABLE ALL ITEMS REF LEVEL COUPLED Analyzer Mode only CENTER B MARKER A CENTER A M...

Page 285: ...reen A displays the receiver bar graph and screen B the scan diagram or the IF analysis diagram Remote command DISP FORM SPL PARAM COUPLING The PARAM COUPLING softkey opens a submenu and a table to select the coupled parameters of receiver and analyzer mode All analyzer traces in MAX HOLD MIN HOLD or AVERAGE mode are set to VIEW after switching to receiver or mixed mode and back to analyzer mode L...

Page 286: ... softkey switches all of the possible couplings to on The coupling of center frequency is switched on therefore coupling of start stop fre quency is switched off Remote command DISABLE ALL ITEMS The DISABLE ALL ITEMS softkey switches all of the possible couplings to off Remote command Minimum Attenuation INST COUP PROT ALL Preamp INST COUP GAIN ALL Preselector INST COUP PRES ALL Demodulator INST C...

Page 287: ...so trace fluctuating interference signals in the frequency and the highest measured value will remain on screen together with the associated fre quency The softkey is only available in receiver mode Remote command DISP BARG PHOL ON BARGRAPH RESET The BARGRAPH RESET softkey resets the stored maximum values of the bar graph measurement The softkey is only available in receiver mode Remote command DI...

Page 288: ... submenu allowing additional display items to be added to the screen In addition the display power save mode DISPLAY PWR SAVE softkey and the colors of the display elements can be set here SCREEN TITLE The SCREEN TITLE softkey activates the entry of a title for the active diagram A or B It switches on or off a title that is already input The length of the title is limited to max 20 characters Remo...

Page 289: ...below DEFAULT COLORS 1 is active in the default setting of the instrument Remote command DISP CMAP DEF1 DISP CMAP DEF2 DISPLAY PWR SAVE The DISPLAY PWR SAVE softkey is used to switch on off the power save mode for the display and to enter the time for the power save function to respond After the elapse of this time the display is completely switched off i e including backlighting The power save mo...

Page 290: ...of the same name The color changes by means of the PREDEFINED COLORS softkey can be seen immediately on the display screen BRIGHTNESS The BRIGHTNESS softkey activates entry of the brightness of the selected graphics element Values between 0 and 100 can be entered Remote command DISP CMAP3 HSL hue sat lum TINT The TINT softkey activates the entry of the color tint of the selected element The entere...

Page 291: ...e command DISP CMAP1 to 26 PDEF color 4 9 3 Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration SETUP Key The SETUP key opens the menu for configuration of the R S ESU SETUP COLOR YELLOW BLACK BLUE BROWN GREEN CYAN RED MAGENTA WHITE GRAY LIGHT GRAY LIGHT BLUE LIGHT GREEN LIGHT CYAN LIGHT RED LIGHT MAGENTA REFERENCE FREQUENCY REFERENCE INTERNAL EXTERNAL REFERENCE EXT INT REFERENCE FREQUENCY REF BW NORM WI...

Page 292: ...AVE TRD SET DELETE VIEW TRANSDUCER REFLVL ADJ AUTO MAN PAGE UP PAGE DOWN GENERAL SETUP GPIB GPIB ADDRESS ID STRING FACTORY ID STRING USER GPIB LANGUAGE IF GAIN NORM PULS SWEEP REP ON OFF COUPLING FSP HP USER PORT USER PORT IN OUT PORT 0 0 1 to PORT 7 0 1 COM INTERFACE TIME DATE CONFIGURE NETWORK COMPUTER NAME IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK DHCP ON OFF CONFIGURE NETWORK SHOW CONFIG NETWORK LOGIN OPTIONS IN...

Page 293: ...ilable for measurements with activated preselection For details refer to section Preamplification and Preselection on page 4 266 The PRESELECT ON OFF softkey is used to switch the preselection For details refer to section Preamplification and Preselection on page 4 266 SYSTEM INFO HARDWARE INFO STATISTICS SYSTEM MESSAGES CLEAR ALL MESSAGES SERVICE INPUT RF INPUT CAL SELFTEST SELFTEST RESULTS ENTER...

Page 294: ...The IF SHIFT softkey opens a submenu to activate or deactivate 1st IF shifting For details refer to IF SHIFT on page 4 298 The RECEIVER PRESET softkey sets the receiver mode as preset mode For details refer to PRESET RECEIVER on page 4 297 The ANALYZER PRESET softkey sets the analyzer mode as preset mode For details refer to PRESET ANALYZER on page 4 297 The SERVICE FUNCTIONS softkey enables addit...

Page 295: ...CE EXTERNAL and then activate REFERENCE EXT INT again The current source internal or external is indicated in the lower part of the softkey Remote command ROSC SOUR EAUT REFERENCE FREQUENCY The REFERENCE FREQUENCY softkey sets the frequency of the external refer ence The range is from 1 MHz to 20 MHz with the default value being 10 MHz The reference frequency does not change after a preset to main...

Page 296: ...oftkey switches an 150 kHz highpass on to protect the receiver input from high signal levels below 150 kHz only for ENV 216 Remote command INP LISN FILT HPAS ON OFF PE GROUNDED PE FLOATING The PE GROUNDED and PE FLOATING softkeys switch the protective earth con ductor chokes on or off Remote command INP LISN PEAR GRO FLO ESH2 Z5 ESH3 Z5 ENV 4200 ENV 216 OFF PHASE N PHASE L1 PHASE L2 PHASE L3 PE GR...

Page 297: ...is distributed over 12 filter bands Two fixed tuned filters are used up to 2 MHz eight tracking passband and high pass filters from 2 MHz to 2000 MHz and two fixed tuned high pass filter above 2 GHz The filters are switched by a relay at 150 kHz and by PIN diode switches above 150 kHz Fig 4 17 Preselection and preamplifier PRESELECT ON OFF The PRESELECT ON OFF softkey switches the preselection on ...

Page 298: ...commended when measurements with a maximum sen sitivity are to be performed If the measurement should be performed at maximum dynamic range the preamplifier should be switched off The gain of the preamplifier is automatically considered in the level display In ana lyzer mode on switching on the preamplifier the RF attenuation or the reference level is adapted depending on the settings of the R S E...

Page 299: ...nsducer is switched on it is considered as part of the unit during the measure ment i e the measured values are displayed in the correct unit and magnitude When working with two measurement windows the transducer is always assigned to two windows R S ESU distinguishes between transducer factor and transducer set A trans ducer factor takes the frequency response of a single transfer element e g an ...

Page 300: ...ement labels column After all transducers have been switched off the R S ESU returns to the unit that was used before a transducer was activated In the analyzer mode an active transducer for a sweep is calculated once in advance for every point displayed and is added to the result of the level measure ment during the sweep If the sweep range changes the correction values are cal culated again If s...

Page 301: ...tion is dis played in addition if a set is active the break setting is displayed The TRANSDUCER FACTOR table comprises all the defined factors with name and unit If the number of defined transducer factors exceeds the number of possible lines in the table the table will be scrolled The TRANSDUCER SET table comprises all the defined transducer sets with the corresponding information Only one set or...

Page 302: ... refer to section Entry and Editing of Transducer Fac tors on page 4 272 DELETE The DELETE softkey deletes the marked factor or set To prevent deletion by mistake deletion has to be confirmed Remote command CORR TRAN DEL VIEW TRANSDUCER The VIEW TRANSDUCER softkey activates the display of the active transducer fac tor or set During the measurement the interpolated characteristic of the active tran...

Page 303: ...lues must always be entered in ascending order Otherwise the entry will not be accepted and the following message is displayed WRONG FREQUENCY SEQUENCE The frequencies entered may exceed the frequency range of the R S ESU since only the set frequency range is taken into account for measurements The minimum frequency of a reference value is 0 Hz the maximum frequency 200 GHz The value range for the...

Page 304: ... is permissible for the name The characters have to comply with the convention of DOS file names If the name exceeds 8 characters the name is truncated The unit automatically stores all transducer factors with the extension TDF If an existing name is changed the factor stored under the previous name is retained and will not be overwritten automatically with the new name The previous factor can be ...

Page 305: ...after entry of the first value using the INSERT LINE and DELETE LINE softkeys To change individual values later on the value has to be selected and a new one entered Remote command CORR TRAN DATA freq level Interpolation Selection of interpolation Linear or logarithmic interpolation can be performed between the frequency refer ence values of the table The ENTER key allows the user to select LIN or...

Page 306: ...in a file on the internal hard disk If there is already a transducer factor that has the same name a confirmation query is output If the new factor is active the new values become immediately valid If a transducer set is switched on comprising the factor the values will only be used when the set is switched on next time Remote command executed automatically after the definition of the reference va...

Page 307: ...eeds 8 characters the name is truncated The unit automatically stores all transducer sets with the extension TDS If an existing name is changed the set stored under the previous name is retained and will not be overwritten automatically with the new name The previous set can be deleted at a later time using DELETE FACTOR SET Thus sets can be copied Remote command CORR TSET SEL name Unit Selection ...

Page 308: ...nge Stop Entry of stop frequency of subrange The individual subranges have to be linked without a gap That is why the start fre quency is already defined from the second subrange stop frequency of previous range Remote command CORR TSET RANG 1 10 freq freq name INS BEFORE RANGE The INS BEFORE RANGE softkey copies the active column and inserts it to the right The frequency limits can be edited Remo...

Page 309: ...nge If none of them is switched on 0 dB is assumed as a factor for the whole subrange Remote command SAVE TRD SET The SAVE TRD SET softkey saves the changed table in a file on the internal hard disk If a transducer name with the same name already exists a corresponding query is performed beforehand If the saved set is switched on the new values will be used immediately Remote command executed auto...

Page 310: ... 30 The default address is 20 Remote command SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 20 ID STRING FACTORY The ID STRING FACTORY softkey selects the default response to the IDN query Remote command ID STRING USER The ID STRING USER softkey opens an editor for entering a user defined response to the IDN query Max length of output string 36 characters Remote command TIME DATE CONFIGURE NETWORK COMPUTER NAME IP ADDRESS S...

Page 311: ...T For 8566A B 8568A B and 8594E command sets A and B are available Com mand sets A and B differ in the rules regarding the command structure from the command structure of SCPI Therefore correct recognition of SCPI commands is not ensured in these operating modes Selecting a language different from SCPI will set the GPIB address to 18 if it was 20 before Start stop frequency reference level and of ...

Page 312: ...ands of HP Models 856xE 8566A B 8568A B and 8594E on page 6 263 If the repeated sweep is OFF the marker is set without sweeping before Model of Trace Points Start Freq Stop Freq Ref Level Input Coupling 8566A B 1001 2 GHz 22 GHz 0 dBm DC 8568A B 1001 0 Hz 1 5 GHz 0 dBm AC 8560E 601 0 Hz 2 9 GHz 0 dBm AC 8561E 601 0 Hz 6 5 GHz 0 dBm AC 8562E 601 0 Hz 13 2 GHz 0 dBm AC 8563E 601 0 Hz 26 5 GHz 0 dBm ...

Page 313: ...wide Over these ports arbitrary bit patterns can be output or input USER PORT The USER PORT softkey opens the submenu for setting the direction of the data transmission and for entering the values of the individual ports USER PORT IN OUT The USER PORT IN OUT determines in which direction the interface transmits data USER PORT read operation The value is indicated in a window A new readout is start...

Page 314: ...baud The default set ting is 9600 baud Remote command SYST COMM SER BAUD 9600 Bits Number of data bits per word For the transmission of text without special characters 7 bits are adequate For binary data as well as for text with special characters 8 bits must be selected default setting Remote command SYST COMM SER BITS 7 Baud rate data transmission rate Bits number of data bits Parity bit parity ...

Page 315: ...nected on both transmitter and receiver For a simple 3 wire connection this is not the case and hardware handshake cannot be used here Default setting is NONE Remote command SYST COMM SER CONT DTR OFF SYST COMM SER CONT RTS OFF SW Handshake Software handshake protocol Besides the hardware handshake mechanism using interface lines it is also possi ble to achieve the same effect by using a software ...

Page 316: ... is partitioned into 3 input fields so that day month and year can be input separately For the selection of the month pressing a unit key opens a list of abbreviations wherein the desired month can be selected Remote command SYST DATE 1009 03 01 Configuration of Network Settings The instrument can be connected to an Ethernet LAN local area network by means of the LAN Interface This allows data tra...

Page 317: ...sists of four number blocks separated by dots Each block con tain 3 numbers in maximum e g 100 100 100 100 but also one ore two numbers are allowed in a block as an example see the preinstalled address For more details see the Quick Start Guide 6 LAN Interface DHCP ON OFF If the DHCP softkey is set ON a new IP address is assigned each time the instru ment is restarted This address must first be de...

Page 318: ...W CONFIG The SHOW CONFIG softkey shows the current network configuration NETWORK LOGIN The NETWORK LOGIN softkey opens the dialog box with the auto login settings Important The password was changed to 123456 with firmware version 4 5 For version 4 5 the password is instrument When a network is installed the preset user name instrument and the password 123456 can be adapted to a new user see the Qu...

Page 319: ...m memory The application hotkey will not be visible in the hotkey bar if the license key is disabled The MIN MEM value lists the additional base system memory required for this appli cation This part of the memory remains allocated when the application is left and therefore is not available for other applications The MAX MEM value is the addi tional worst case memory demand of the application The ...

Page 320: ... KEY INVALID is displayed in the status line Remote command REMOVE OPTION The REMOVE OPTION softkey removes all firmware options from the instruments Execution of this function must be confirmed in a message box in order to avoid removal of the firmware options by mistake Remote command Emulation of the Instrument Front Panel SOFT FRONTPANEL The SOFT FRONTPANEL softkey switches the display of the ...

Page 321: ...e rear panel Prior to performing the resolution change the user is prompted for confirmation whether the required monitor is connected Switching off the front panel display restores the original screen resolution Key assignment Button labels largely correspond to those of the front panel keys The rotation func tion of the rotary knob is assigned to the KNOB LEFT and KNOB RIGHT buttons the press fu...

Page 322: ...le HARDWARE INFO consists of six columns Display of Device Statistics STATISTICS The STATISTICS softkey opens the table STATISTICS This table contains the model information serial number firmware version and specifications version of the basic device Additionally the operating time of the instrument the power on cycles as well as attenuator switching cycles are displayed HARDWARE INFO STATISTICS S...

Page 323: ...sages are placed at the top of the list The following information is available Messages that have occurred since the last call to the SYSTEM MESSAGES menu are marked with an asterisk The CLEAR ALL MESSAGES softkey is activated and allows clearing of the error buffer If the number of error messages exceeds the capacity of the error buffer the mes sage appearing first is Message buffer overflow No D...

Page 324: ...CE softkey opens a submenu for selection of the service function The INPUT RF and INPUT CAL softkeys are mutually exclusive selection switches Only one switch can be active at any one time The service functions are not necessary for normal measurement operation How ever incorrect use can affect correct operation and or data integrity of the R S ESU Therefore many of the functions can only be used ...

Page 325: ...and are only usable after the entry of a password see instrument service man ual Remote command SYST PASS Password CAL GEN 128 MHZ The CAL GEN 128 MHZ softkey selects a sinusoidal signal at 128 MHz as output signal for the internal calibration source The internal pulse generator will be switched off Remote command DIAG SERV INP CAL DIAG SERV INP PULS OFF CAL GEN COMB PULSE This softkey switches th...

Page 326: ... device In this case Export the instrument data of device 1 Switch instrument 1 off Remove the flash disk from device 1 Insert the flash disk into device 2 Switch instrument 2 on Import the instrument data of device 2 saved before Note that a new export of the specific instrument data is required whenever A new option key was inserted The Rohde Schwarz Service refitted a board The Rohde Schwarz Se...

Page 327: ...8 Firmware Update For the latest firmware version refer to the Rohde Schwarz internet site and down load the most up to date firmware A detailed description about performing the firmware update in the intrument is given in the release note provided on this CD The release note is also downloadable from the Rohde Schwarz internet site The installation of a new firmware version can be performed using...

Page 328: ...ehaviour when changing the active application e g from SPECTRUM to FM DEMOD and back from FM DEMOD to SPECTRUM In the default state OFF a few parameters of the current analyzer setting are passed to the application e g center frequency level settings or from the application back to the analyzer mode If APPL SETUP RECOVERY is switched ON the settings of the applications are independent of each othe...

Page 329: ...F attenuation values It can be overcome by shifting the 1st IF IF SHIFT OFF The IF SHIFT OFF softkey deactivates the 1st IF shifting Remote command SWE IF SHIF OFF Remote command SWE IF SHIF OFF IF SHIFT A The IF SHIFT A softkey is appropriate for input signals in the frequency range of 2270 MHz to 2310 MHz Remote command SWE IF SHIF A Remote command SWE IF SHIF A IF SHIFT B The IF SHIFT B softkey...

Page 330: ...rmatting storage media copying and deleting renaming files The R S ESU is capable of internally storing complete instrument settings with instrument configurations and measurement data in the form of data sets The respective data are stored on the internal hard disk or if selected on a memory stick or on a flash disk The hard disk and flash disk drives have the following names flash disk F hard di...

Page 331: ... consists of a base name followed by an underscore and three numbers e g limit_lines_005 In the example the base name is limit_lines The base name can contain characters numbers and underscores The file exten sion is added automatically and can not be changed The SAVE RECALL table contains the entry fields for editing the data set Remote command MMEM STOR STAT 1 f test02 MMEM LOAD STAT 1 f test02 ...

Page 332: ...COMMENT The EDIT COMMENT softkey activates the entry of commentary concerning the cur rent data set The focus is set on the Comment field and an on screen keyboard opens Remote command MMEM COMM Setup for FM measurement SELECT ITEMS The SELECT ITEMS softkey moves the selection bar to the first line left column of the Items field An entry is selected Position the entry focus to the corresponding pa...

Page 333: ...on of the restored deactivated limit lines depends on the sequence of use with command MMEM LOAD the activated transducer factor user defined color settings configuration for hardcopy output active transducer set A data set may contain maximum 4 transducer factors It always contain the activated factors and the factors used and de activated last if any Consequently the combination of the restored ...

Page 334: ...tion of a data set which is auto matically loaded when the instrument is powered on and after PRESET For this pur pose the Dialog Startup Recall is opened analogously to DATA SET LIST The field Files lists all data sets stored in the selected directory The currently selected data set is checked In addition to the data sets stored by the user the data set FACTORY which speci fies the settings of th...

Page 335: ...ys COPY RENAME CUT and DELETE are only visible if the entry focus is set to a file and not to a directory The dots open up the next higher directory EDIT PATH The EDIT PATH softkey activates the input of the directory which will be used in sub sequent file operations Use CURSOR UP DOWN to select a drive and confirm your selection with ENTER Open subdirectories by using CURSOR RIGHT and use CURSOR ...

Page 336: ...the ENTER key Remote command MMEM COPY D user set cfg a RENAME The RENAME softkey opens the help line editor to rename a file or a directory anal ogously to the COPY softkey Remote command MMEM MOVE test02 cfg set2 cfg CUT The CUT softkey shifts the selected file into the clipboard from where it can be cop ied into a different directory at a later time by means of PASTE Remote command PASTE The PA...

Page 337: ...test SORT MODE The SORT MODE softkey opens the submenu to select the sorting mode for the dis played files Directory names are located at the top of the list after the entry for the next higher directory level Remote command NAME The NAME softkey sorts the file list by name Remote command DATE The DATE softkey sorts the file list by date Remote command EXTENSION The EXTENSION softkey sorts the fil...

Page 338: ...struction of disk data confirmation by the user is requested Remote command MMEM INIT a 4 9 5 Measurement Documentation HCOPY Key The HCOPY key opens the HARDCOPY menu for starting and configuring the print out The installation and configuration of printers is described in the Quick Start Guide chapters 1 Preparing for Use 6 LAN Interface and appendix A HCOPY The second file list can also be opene...

Page 339: ...ressing one of the PRINT softkeys the file name to which the output data is to be written is requested An entry field is then opened for enter ing the file name For detailed information refer to section DEVICE SETUP on page 4 309 The COLORS submenu allows switch over between black and white and color print outs default provided that the printer connected can produce color printouts In addition the...

Page 340: ...lay screen without auxiliary information Specifically no markers or display lines are printed Remote command HCOP ITEM WIND TRAC STAT ON HCOP IMM PRINT TABLE The PRINT TABLE softkey starts the output of all tables and info lists visible on the display screen without the measurement diagrams and other information lying behind Remote command HCOP ITEM WIND TABL STAT ON HCOP IMM DEVICE SETUP The DEVI...

Page 341: ...ry line editor can be reached with the Ud key Pressing the rotary knob or the ENTER key inserts the selected charac ters in the text line After editing is completed return to the text line with the Uu key and confirm the comment text with ENTER If the entered comment should be aborted quit the auxiliary line editor with ESC A detailed description of the auxiliary line editor can be found in the Qu...

Page 342: ...t on the printout The default setting is COLOR ON Remote command HCOP DEV COL ON SCREEN COLORS The SCREEN COLORS softkey selects the current screen colors for the printout Remote command HCOP CMAP DEF1 OPTIMIZED COLOR SET The OPTIMIZED COLOR SET softkey selects an optimized color setting for the printout to improve the visibility of the colors on the hardcopy Trace 1 is blue trace 2 black trace 3 ...

Page 343: ...d The per centage entered refers to a continuous color spectrum from red 0 to blue 100 Remote command HCOP CMAP5 HSL hue sat lum SATURATION The SATURATION softkey serves for determining the saturation of the element selected A value between 0 and 100 can be entered Remote command HCOP CMAP5 HSL hue sat lum Background Grid Function field status field data entry text Function field LED on Function f...

Page 344: ... a submenu for configuring and starting the printout of a test report In contrast to the hardcopy which is restricted to the contents of the screen the test report consists of more different items such as a diagram a header a scan table and lists with measurement results Remote command HCOP MODE TREP SETUP The SETUP softkey opens the Report Setup dialog to select the file format and the printer CO...

Page 345: ... processors When a file format is selected printing to a file is set automatically The file name is queried when the PRINT softkey is pressed Under Printer select a printer also a preconfigured network printer by selecting Printer with the rotary knob and then confirm by pressing the rotary knob or the ENTER key After confirmation the entries in the Name and Orientation list are available for sele...

Page 346: ... command HCOP TREP ITEM TEMP CAT LOAD TEMPLATE The LOAD TEMPLATE softkey opens a list of all defined layouts Select the desired template using the rotary knob or the cursor keys and then confirm by pressing the ENTER key Remote command HCOP TREP ITEM TEMP LOAD FULL REPORT EDIT CURRENT The EDIT CURRENT softkey opens the Edit Current Template dialog to edit the cur rently active template LOAD TEMPLA...

Page 347: ...HCOP TREP ITEM DIAG STAT ON HCOP TREP ITEM FRES STAT ON HCOP TREP ITEM PAG STAT ON HCOP TREP ITEM SCAN STAT ON HCOP TREP ITEM SRES STAT ON HCOP TREP ITEM TDST STAT ON HCOP TREP ITEM TRAN STAT ON HCOP TREP ITEM DEF DELETE TEMPLATE The DELETE TEMPLATE softkey opens a list of all defined layouts Select the tem plate to be deleted using the rotary knob or the cursor keys and then confirm by pressing t...

Page 348: ...ol lowing message is displayed Previous Report Will Be Lost Remote command HCOP TREP NEW APPEND The APPEND softkey appends a test report to the existing report The Edit Header dialog is displayed and the contents of the header can be edited It is possible to cre ate reports that contain the results of several measurements The report is stored in internal memory until it is printed Remote command H...

Page 349: ...R S ESU Instrument Functions Basic Settings 4 318 Operating Manual 1302 6163 12 03 ...

Page 350: ...ing generator can be used in all operating modes Acquisition of test setup calibration values SOURCE CAL and normalization using these correction values NORMALIZE is only possible in the NETWORK operating mode The tracking generator is activated by means of the NETWORK hotkey in the hotkey bar at the bottom of the screen for details refer to section Mode Selection Hotkey Bar on page 4 9 4 10 1 Tra...

Page 351: ...played output power values on screen or during data entry POWER SWEEP POWER SWP ON OFF START POWER STOP POWER Additional softkeys are available in the displayed menus for controlling an external generator if option External Generator Control R S FSP B10 is fitted For detailed information see section External Generator Control Option R S FSP B10 on page 4 333 When the tracking generator is switched...

Page 352: ...nsmission characteristics of a two port network The built in tracking generator serves as a signal source It is connected to the input connector of the DUT The input of the R S ESU is fed from the output of the DUT Fig 4 20 Test setup for transmission measurement A calibration can be carried out to compensate for the effects of the test setup e g frequency response of connecting cables 4 10 2 1 Ca...

Page 353: ...surements the whole test setup is through connected THRU CAL TRANS The CAL TRANS softkey triggers the calibration of the transmission measurement It starts a sweep that records a reference trace This trace is then used to calculate the difference for the normalized values Fig 4 21 Calibration curve for transmission measurement During the calibration the following message is displayed After the cal...

Page 354: ...e normalization is switched on in the currently active window Different types of normalization can be active in the two windows Normalization is aborted when the NETWORK operating mode is quit Remote command CORR ON REF VALUE POSITION The REF VALUE POSITION softkey marks a reference position in the active window at which the normalization result calculated difference with a reference trace is dis ...

Page 355: ...sured trace and the reference trace Setting the REF VALUE to a different value helps to compensate for changes to the level conditions in the signal path after the calibration data have been recorded If e g after a source calibration a 10 dB attenuation is inserted into the signal path between DUT and R S ESU input the measurement trace will be moved by 10 dB down Entering a REF VALUE of 10 dB wil...

Page 356: ...line has been moved by entering a REF VALUE of 10 dB the deviation from the nominal power level can be displayed with high resolution e g 1 dB div The power is still displayed in absolute values which means that in the above example 1 dB below the nominal power reference line 11 dB attenuation Fig 4 25 Measurement of a 10dB attenuator pad with 1dB DIV Remote command DISP WIND TRAC Y RVAL 10dB ...

Page 357: ...es the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor with up to 625 points The trace data are converted to a transducer with unit dB after the transducer name has been entered The number of points is defined by SWEEP COUNT The frequency points are allocated in equidistant steps between start and stop frequency The generated transducer factor can be further adapted in the SETUP menu T...

Page 358: ...r and a reference curve independent of the selected type of measurement transmission reflection The hardware settings used for measuring the reference curve are included in the reference data set Even with normalization switched on the device settings can be changed in a wide area without stopping the normalization This reduces the necessity to carry out a new normalization to a minimum For this p...

Page 359: ... corresponds to a doubling of the span Aborted normalization 625 and more extrapolated points within the current sweep limits in case of span doubling At a reference level REF LEVEL of 10 dBm and at a tracking generator output level of the same value the R S ESU operates without overrange reserve i e the R S ESU is in danger of being overloaded if a signal is applied whose amplitude is higher than...

Page 360: ...ts FREQUENCY OFFSET The FREQUENCY OFFSET softkey activates the input of the frequency offset between the output signal of the tracking generator and the input frequency of the R S ESU Possible offsets are in a range of 200 MHz in 0 1 Hz steps The default setting is 0 Hz Offsets 0 Hz are marked with the enhancement label FRQ If a positive frequency offset is entered the tracking generator generates...

Page 361: ...time and which ones can be combined with the fre quency offset function Table 4 7 Simultaneous modes of modulation tracking generator can be combined EXT AM The EXT AM softkey activates an AM modulation of the tracking generator output signal The modulation signal is applied to the TG IN I AM connector An input voltage of 1 V corresponds to 100 amplitude modulation Switching on an external AM disa...

Page 362: ... modulation disables the following functions active external AM active external FM Functional description of the quadrature modulator Fig 4 28 I Q modulation I Q modulation is performed by means of the built in quadrature modulator The RF signal is divided into two orthogonal I and Q components in phase and quadrature phase Amplitude and phase are controlled in each path by the I and Q modulation ...

Page 363: ...r is changed linear from start power to stop power The start and stop power values are shown on the right side below the diagram Remote command SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR POW MODE FIX START POWER The START POWER softkey defines the start power of the power sweep The start power can be set between 30 dBm and 5 dBm With the option R S FSU B12 the power can be set between 100 and 5 dBm Remote command SOU...

Page 364: ...ng procedure has to be completed before recording of measured values is possible In the case of generators with TTL interface a list of the frequencies to be set is entered into the generator before the beginning of the first sweep Then the sweep is started and the next frequency point selected by means of the TTL handshake line TRIGGER The recording of measured values is only enabled when the gen...

Page 365: ...m Remote command SOUR EXT POW 20dBm POWER OFFSET The POWER OFFSET softkey activates the entry of a constant level offset of the generator With this offset attenuator pads or amplifiers connected to the output connector of the generator can be handled during the input and output of output lev els The external generator control is only available in the spectrum analyzer mode and not in the receiver ...

Page 366: ...of the R S ESU is fed from the output of the DUT Fig 4 29 Test setup for transmission measurement A calibration can be carried out to compensate for the effects of the test setup e g frequency response of connecting cables 4 11 2 1 Calibration of Transmission Measurement SOURCE CAL The SOURCE CAL softkey opens a submenu comprising the calibration functions for the transmission and reflection measu...

Page 367: ...n measurement It starts a sweep that records a reference trace This trace is then used to obtain the differences to the normalized values Fig 4 30 Calibration curve for transmission measurement During the calibration the following message is displayed After the calibration sweep the following message is displayed This message is cleared after approx 3 seconds Remote command CORR METH TRAN ...

Page 368: ...he normalization is switched on in the current win dow Different normalizations can be active in the two windows Normalization is aborted when the NETWORK mode is quit Remote command CORR ON REF VALUE POSITION The REF VALUE POSITION softkey reference position marks a reference position in the active window on which the normalization difference formation with a refer ence curve is performed When pr...

Page 369: ...level difference which is assigned to the reference line In the default setting the reference line corresponds to a level difference of 0 dB If e g a 10 dB attenuator pad is inserted between DUT and R S ESU input between recording of the calibration data and normalization the trace will be shifted down by 10 dB By entering a REF VALUE of 10 dB the reference line for difference forma tion can also ...

Page 370: ...fter the reference line has been shifted by entering REF VALUE 10 dB depar tures from the nominal value can be displayed with high resolution e g 1 dB Div The absolute measured values are still displayed in the above example 1 dB below nominal value reference line 11 dB attenuation Fig 4 34 Measurement of a 10 dB attenuator pad with 1dB DIV Remote command DISP WIND TRAC Y RVAL 10dB ...

Page 371: ...OR SAVE AS TRD FACTOR uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor with up to 625 points The trace data are converted to a transducer with unit dB after the transducer name has been entered The number of points is defined by SWEEP COUNT The frequency points are allocated in equidistant steps between start and stop frequency The generated transducer factor can be further ada...

Page 372: ...ce curve independent of the selected type of measurement transmission reflection The hardware settings used for measuring the reference curve are included in the reference data set Even with normalization switched on the device settings can be changed in a wide area without stopping the normalization This reduces the necessity to carry out a new normalization to a minimum For this purpose the refe...

Page 373: ...mits corresponds to a doubling of the span Aborted normalization more than 500 extrapolated points within the current sweep limits in case of span doubling At a reference level REF LEVEL of 10 dBm and at a tracking generator output level of the same value the analyzer operates without overrange reserve i e the analyzer is in danger of being overloaded if a signal is applied whose amplitude is high...

Page 374: ...UENCY OFFSET The FREQUENCY OFFSET softkey activates the input of the frequency offset between the output signal of the generator and the input frequency of the R S ESU The value range depends on the selected generator The default setting is 0 Hz Offsets 0 Hz are marked with the enhancement label FRQ If a positive frequency offset is entered the tracking generator generates an output signal above t...

Page 375: ...02 6163 12 03 4 11 6 Configuration of an External Generator EXT SOURCE The EXT SOURCE softkey opens a submenu for configuration of the external gen erator The R S ESU is able to manage two generators one of which can be active at the time EXT SRC ON OFF SELECT GENERATOR FREQUENCY SWEEP GEN REF INT EXT ...

Page 376: ...supported by the R S ESU is to be found in section List of Generator Types Supported by the R S ESU on page 4 347 When switching on the external generator by means of EXT SRC ON the R S ESU switches off the internal tracking generator and starts programming the generator settings via the GPIB interface IEC2 Programming requires takeover of the remote control at this interface by the R S ESU To avo...

Page 377: ...ve generator Addresses from 0 to 30 are possible MODE Operating mode of generator The generator activated using the FREQUENCY SWEEP softkey is automatically set to remote mode REMOTE the other to manual operation LOCAL F MIN F MAX Frequency range of generator Select the start and stop frequency of the R S ESU in a way that the specified range is not exceeded If the start frequency lies below F MIN...

Page 378: ...8 30 SMGU GPIB 100 kHz 2 16 GHz 140 13 SMH GPIB 100 kHz 2 0 GHz 140 13 SMHU GPIB 100 kHz 4 32 GHz 140 13 SMIQ02B TTL 300 kHz 2 2 GHz 144 13 SMIQ02E GPIB 300 kHz 2 2 GHz 144 13 SMIQ03B TTL 300 kHz 3 3 GHz 144 13 SMIQ03E GPIB 300 kHz 3 3 GHz 144 13 SMIQ04B TTL 300 kHz 4 4 GHz 144 10 SMIQ06B TTL 300 kHz 6 4 GHz 144 10 SML01 GPIB 9 kHz 1 1 GHz 140 13 SML02 GPIB 9 kHz 2 2 GHz 140 13 SML03 GPIB 9 kHz 3 ...

Page 379: ... GHz 130 3 20 3 SMT02 GPIB 5 0 kHz 1 5 GHz 144 13 SMT03 GPIB 5 0 kHz 3 0 GHz 144 13 SMT06 GPIB 5 0 kHz 6 0 GHz 144 13 SMV03 GPIB 9 kHz 3 3 GHz 140 13 SMU200A TTL 100 kHz 2 2 GHz 145 13 SMU02B31 TTL 100 kHz 2 2 GHz 145 19 SMU03 4 TTL 100 kHz 3 GHz 145 13 SMU03B31 TTL 100 kHz 3 GHz 145 19 SMU04 TTL 100 kHz 4 GHz 145 13 SMU04B31 TTL 100 kHz 4 GHz 145 19 SMU06 TTL 100 kHz 6 GHz 145 13 SMU06B31 TTL 100...

Page 380: ...ontrol in the SELECT GENERATOR table POWER Permits to enter the generator level within the limits P MIN to P MAX of the SELECT GENERATOR table NUM Numerator DEN Denominator OFFSET Offset used to derive the generator frequency from the current frequency of the R S ESU according to the following formula Note that the frequencies resulting from start and stop frequency of the R S ESU do not exceed th...

Page 381: ...rator crosses the 0 Hz Frequency it is indicated by the additional statement via 0 Hz Example for reverse sweep via 0 Hz FAnalyzerStart 100 MHz FAnalyzerStop 200 MHz FOffset 150 MHz Numerator Denominator 1 FGeneratorStart 50 MHz FGeneratorStop 50 MHz via 0 Hz Remote command SOUR EXT FREQ NUM 1 SOUR EXT FREQ DEN 1 SOUR EXT FREQ OFFS 300MHZ RESULT The frequency range of the generator resulting from ...

Page 382: ...GEN REF INT EXT softkey switches over the reference oscillator of the gener ator switch over between internal and external reference source Selection EXT allows connecting the external generator to an external reference frequency source The internal reference source is selected as the default setting Remote command SOUR EXT1 ROSC INT ...

Page 383: ... user must log into the network only once and is given access to the resources according to his her access rights The individ ual resources and users are managed as objects in a hierarchical tree NDS TREE The position of the object in the tree is referred to as CONTEXT with NETWARE and must be known for access to the resources 4 12 2 MICROSOFT Network In case of a MICROSOFT network data can be exc...

Page 384: ...x xx IP address e g 89 0 0 13 Data transfer The command PUT file name transfers the data to the target system The command GET file name transfers the data from the target system The command TYPE B transfers the data in BINARY format no conversion takes place The command TYPE A transfers the data in ASCII format converting control characters so that text files can also be read on the target system ...

Page 385: ...e control applications For 16 bit applications the file RSIB DLL must be additionally copied to the directories mentioned The files RSIB DLL and RSIB32 DLL are included on the instrument in directory D R_S Instr RSIB For the different programming languages there are files available that contain the declarations of the DLL functions and the definition of the error codes For C C programs import libr...

Page 386: ...ink name librsib so and pointing to librsib so X Y in a directory for which the control application has read rights Example ln s usr lib librsib so 1 0 usr lib librsib so Linker options for creating applications lrsib import library Lxxx path information where the import library can be found This is where the above file link has been created Example L usr lib Additional linker options for creating...

Page 387: ...SDLLilwrt Sends a certain number of bytes to a device RSDLLibwrtf Sends the contents of a file to a device RSDLLibrd Reads data from a device into a string RSDLLilrd Reads a certain number of bytes from a device RSDLLibrdf Reads data from a device into a file RSDLLibtmo Sets time out for RSIB functions RSDLLibsre Switches a device to the local or remote state RSDLLibloc Temporarily switches a devi...

Page 388: ...bytes each time a read or write function is called Bit designation Bit Hex code Description ERR 15 8000 Is set when an error has occurred on calling a function If this bit is set iberr contains an error code that specifies the error in greater detail TIMO 14 4000 Is set when a time out has occurred on calling a function CMPL 8 0100 Is set if the response of the GPIB parser has been read out comple...

Page 389: ... with the handle ud VB format Function RSDLLibfind ByVal udName ibsta iberr ibcntl As Integer C format short WINAPI RSDLLibfind char far udName short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format UNIX short RSDLLibfind char udName short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcntl Parameters udName IP address of device Example ud RSDLLibfind 89 10 38 97 ibsta iberr ibcntl VB format Functio...

Page 390: ...unsigned long Cnt short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcntl Parameters ud Device handle Wrt String sent to the GPIB parser Cnt Number of bytes sent to the device Example RSDLLilwrt ud 100 ibsta iberr ibcntl VB format Function RSDLLibwrtf ByVal ud ByVal file ibsta iberr ibcntl As Integer C format short WINAPI RSDLLibwrt short ud char far Wrt short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcn...

Page 391: ...e string RSDLLibrdf Reads data from the device with the handle ud into the file file VB format Function RSDLLilrd ByVal ud ByVal Rd ByVal Cnt ibsta iberr ibcntl As Integer C format short WINAPI RSDLLilrd short ud char far Rd unsigned long Cnt short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format UNIX short RSDLLilrd short ud char Rd unsigned long Cnt short ibsta short iberr unsigned lo...

Page 392: ...rt tmo short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcntl Parameters ud Device handle tmo Time out in seconds Example RSDLLibtmo ud 10 ibsta iberr ibcntl VB format Function RSDLLibsre ByVal ud ByVal v ibsta iberr ibcntl As Integer C format void WINAPI RSDLLibsre short ud short v short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format UNIX short RSDLLibsre short ud short v short ibsta short ibe...

Page 393: ...forms a serial poll and provides the status byte of the device VB format Function RSDLLibeot ByVal ud ByVal v ibsta iberr ibcntl As Integer C format void WINAPI RSDLLibsre short ud short v short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format UNIX short RSDLLibsre short ud short v short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcntl Parameters ud Device handle v 0 no END message 1 send END mes...

Page 394: ...ta iberr ibcntl As Integer C format void WINAPI RSDLLibonl short ud short v short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format short RSDLLibonl short ud short v short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcntl Parameters ud Device handle v Device state 0 local 1 remote Example RSDLLibonl ud 0 ibsta iberr ibcntl VB format Function RSDLLTestSrq ByVal ud Result ibsta iberr ibcntl As Intege...

Page 395: ...sult ibsta iberr ibcntl As Integer C format void WINAPI RSDLLWaitSrq short ud short far result short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format UNIX short RSDLLWaitSrq short ud short result short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcntl Parameters ud Device handle result Reference to an integer value in which the library returns the status of the SRQ bit 0 No SRQ occurred during the...

Page 396: ...ommand Space Generating a string of the length 100 Dim Response as String 100 Dim Response as String Response Space 100 If a response is to be output as a string from the measuring instrument the appended blanks can be removed using the Visual Basic Function RTrim Example Response Space 100 Call RSDLLibrd ud Response ibsta iberr ibcntl Response RTrim Response Output of Response Reading out trace d...

Page 397: ...ts As Byte Number of digits of length indication Dim TraceBytes As Long Length of trace data in bytes Dim TraceData 625 As Single Buffer for floating point Binary data Set up connection to instrument ud RSDLLibfind 89 10 38 97 ibsta iberr ibcntl Query trace data in real format Call RSDLLibwrt ud FORM DATA REAL 32 ibsta iberr ibcntl Call RSDLLibwrt ud TRACE TRACE1 ibsta iberr ibcntl Read number of ...

Page 398: ...trument Dim Response As String Response string Set up connection to measuring instrument ud RSDLLibfind 89 10 38 97 ibsta iberr ibcntl If ud 0 Then Error treatment End If Send query command Call RSDLLibwrt ud FREQ START ibsta iberr ibcntl Provide space for response Response Space 100 Read response from measuring instrument Call RSDLLibrd ud Response ibsta iberr ibcntl In this example a Save Recall...

Page 399: ...berr ibcntl and send the data Call RSDLLibwrtf ud C db sav ibsta iberr ibcntl 4 14 2 2 Visual Basic for Applications Winword and Excel Programming tips The programming language Visual Basic for Applications VBA is supported as a macro language by various manufacturers The programs Winword and Excel use this language for the versions Winword 97 or Excel 5 0 and higher For macros created with Visual...

Page 400: ...esponse RTrim Response Cut off space Insert value in current document Winword Selection InsertBefore Response Selection Collapse wdCollapseEnd Terminate connection to measuring instrument Call RSDLLibonl ud 0 ibsta iberr ibcntl End Sub The entry of the peak value in the Winword document can be replaced as follows for Excel Insert value in current document Excel ActiveCell FormulaR1C1 Response 4 14...

Page 401: ...rings If instrument responses are to be further processed as strings a zero termination must be appended Example char buffer 100 RSDLLibrd ud buffer ibsta iberr ibcntl buffer ibcntl 0 Programming example In the following C program example a single sweep is started on the device with the IP address 89 10 38 97 and subsequently a marker is set to maximum level Prior to the search for maximum a synch...

Page 402: ... request at the end of the sweep RSDLLibwrt ud INIT CONT off INIT OPC ibsta iberr ibcntl Wait for SRQ end of sweep RSDLLWaitSrq ud srq ibsta iberr ibcntl Clear RQS MSS bit RSDLLibrsp ud spr ibsta iberr ibcntl if sweep is terminated if srq then set marker to first maximum and query the level RSDLLibwrt ud CALC MARK MAX Y ibsta iberr ibcntl RSDLLilrd ud MaxPegel MAX_RESP_LEN ibsta iberr ibcntl MaxPe...

Page 403: ...e start of a measurement hardware settling times are allowed for the R S ESU before data acquisition is started Trigger signals received by the R S ESU during the settling time will therefore be ignored This behavior is not critical in most cases as long as the trigger signal is periodic and the test signal is stationary Fig 4 37 Test with stationary test signal and periodic trigger signal In the ...

Page 404: ...rument settings To minimize this overhead the port supplies a signal that indicates the R S ESU s readiness to collect measured data The signal is reset on detection of the next trig ger signal In this way a handshake is established between the R S ESU and the DUT and between the R S ESU and the controller which ensures reliable measure ments and reduces the time overhead to the settling time actu...

Page 405: ...R S ESU Instrument Functions User Port 4 374 Operating Manual 1302 6163 12 03 ...

Page 406: ... 4 2Return to Manual Operation 5 8 5 45 Messages 5 8 5 45 1 GPIB Interface Messages 5 8 5 45 2 Device Messages Commands and Device Responses 5 8 5 46 Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages 5 9 5 46 1 SCPI Introduction 5 9 5 46 2 Structure of a Command 5 9 5 46 3 Structure of a Command Line 5 12 5 46 4 Responses to Queries 5 13 5 46 5 Parameters 5 13 5 46 6 Overview of Syntax Elements 5 15 5 4...

Page 407: ...STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit Register 5 25 5 47 3 7STATus QUEStionable FREQuency Register 5 26 5 47 3 8STATus QUEStionable LIMit 1 2 Register 5 27 5 47 3 9STATus QUEStionable LMARgin 1 2 Register 5 28 5 47 3 10STATus QUEStionable POWer Register 5 29 5 47 3 11STATus QUEStionalble TRANsducer Register 5 30 5 47 4 Application of the Status Reporting Systems 5 31 5 47 4 1Service Request Making Use of t...

Page 408: ...o connect a controller for remote control In addition the instrument can be remotely controlled in a local area network LAN interface The instrument supports the SCPI version 1997 0 Standard Commands for Pro grammable Instruments The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488 2 and aims at the standardization of device specific commands error handling and the status registers see section SCPI Int...

Page 409: ...AL key at the front panel 5 4 Starting Remote Control On power on the instrument is always in the manual operating state LOCAL state and can be operated via the front panel It is switched to remote control REMOTE state During remote control operation via the front panel is disabled The instrument remains in the remote state until it is reset to the manual state via the front panel or via remote co...

Page 410: ...or via remote control Addresses 0 to 30 are permissible Manually 1 Call SETUP GENERAL SETUP menu 2 Enter desired address in table GPIB ADDRESS 3 Terminate input using the ENTER key Via GPIB CALL IBFIND DEV1 analyzer Open port to the instrument CALL IBPAD analyzer 20 Inform controller about old address CALL IBWRT analyzer SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 18 Set instrument to new address CALL IBPAD analyzer 18 I...

Page 411: ...t the control characters including can be recognized by the interface Manually Setting the COM interface 1 Call SETUP GENERAL SETUP menu 2 Select desired baudrate bits stopbit parity in table COM PORT 3 Set owner to OS in table COM PORT 4 Terminate input using the ENTER key 5 4 3 2 Return to Manual Operation Return to manual operation is possible via the front panel or via RS 232 interface Manuall...

Page 412: ...s via VXI11 or RSIB is usually achieved from high level program ming platforms by using VISA as an intermediate abstraction layer VISA encapsu lates the low level VXI RSIB or even GPIB function calls and thus makes the transport interface transparent for the user The necessary VISA library is available as a separate product For details contact your local R S sales representative 5 4 4 1 Setting th...

Page 413: ... by a controller which has the remote control Interface commands can be subdivided into universal commands and addressed commands Universal commands act on all devices connected to the GPIB without previous addressing addressed commands only act on devices previously addressed as lis teners The interface messages relevant to the instrument are listed in chapter Maintenance and Instrument Interface...

Page 414: ...rd Commands for Programmable Instruments describes a standard command set for programming instruments irrespective of the type of instrument or manufacturer The goal of the SCPI consortium is to standardize the device specific commands to a large extent For this purpose a model was developed which defines the same functions inside a device or for different devices Command sys tems were generated w...

Page 415: ...epresented by combined headers Headers of the highest level root level have only one key word This key word denotes a complete command system Example SENSe This key word denotes the command system SENSe For commands of lower levels the complete path has to be specified starting on the left with the highest level the individual key words being separated by a colon Example SENSe FREQuency SPAN 10MHZ...

Page 416: ...compatibility with the SCPI standard Some commands are considerably shortened by these optional key words Example SENSe BANDwidth RESolution AUTO This command couples the resolution bandwidth of the instrument to other parame ters The following command has the same effect BANDwidth AUTO Long and short form The key words feature a long form and a short form Either the short form or the long form ca...

Page 417: ...0 This command line contains two commands The first one is part of the SENSe command system and is used to determine the center frequency of the instrument The second one is part of the INPut command system and sets the input signal attenuation If the successive commands belong to the same system having one or several lev els in common the command line can be abbreviated For that purpose the secon...

Page 418: ...d in a short form Example SYSTem COMMunicate SERial CONTrol RTS Response for standard STAN 5 6 5 Parameters Most commands require a parameter to be specified The parameters must be sep arated from the header by a white space Permissible parameters are numerical values Boolean parameters text character strings and block data The type of parameter required for the respective command and the permissi...

Page 419: ... or 9 9E37 respectively INF and NINF are only sent as device responses NAN Not A Number NAN represents the value 9 91E37 NAN is only sent as device response This value is not defined Possible causes are the division of zero by zero the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of missing values Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically tru...

Page 420: ... are transmitted This format only supports a byte count up to 9 digits for the number of bytes For more than 999999999 bytes following additional format is used Example HEADer HEADer 1100000000 xxxxxxxx The byte length count if put into brackets In the example the byte counts indicates a length of 1 100 000 000 bytes The data bytes follow the close bracket 5 6 6 Overview of Syntax Elements The fol...

Page 421: ...d up to then are processed Subsequently the GPIB traffic is continued If however the buffer is not yet full when receiving the delimiter the input unit can already receive the next command during command recognition and execution The receipt of a DCL clears the input buffer and immediately initiates a message to the command recognition 5 6 9 Command Recognition The command recognition analyses the...

Page 422: ... execution error is signalled to the status reporting system The alteration of the data base are cancelled the instrument hardware is not reset GPIB queries induce the data base management to send the desired data to the out put unit 5 6 11 Status Reporting System The status reporting system collects information on the instrument state and makes it available to the output unit on request The exact...

Page 423: ...ble SRE form the uppermost level The STB receives its information from the standard event sta tus register ESR which is also defined in IEEE 488 2 with the associated mask reg ister standard event status enable ESE and registers STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable which are defined by SCPI and contain detailed information on the instrument The IST flag Individual STatus and the parallel poll ...

Page 424: ...ment status This register part can only be read but not written into or cleared Its contents is not affected by read ing PTRansition part The Positive TRansition part acts as an edge detector When a bit of the CONDition part is changed from 0 to 1 the associated PTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 PTR bit 1 the EVENt bit is set PTR bit 0 the EVENt bit is not set This part can be writ...

Page 425: ...d with the associated ENABle bit symbol The results of all logical operations of this part are passed on to the sum bit via an OR function symbol ENABle Bit 0 the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit ENABle Bit 1 if the associated EVENT bit is 1 the sum bit is set to 1 as well This part can be written into and read by the user at will Its contents is not affected by reading Sum ...

Page 426: ...orting System 5 7 2 Overview of the Status Registers The following figure shows the status registers used by the R S ESU base unit The status registers used by the R S ESU options are described in the separate soft ware manuals Fig 5 43 Overview of the status registers base unit ...

Page 427: ... in greater detail by polling the error queue The poll provides an informative error message This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems involved with GPIB control 3 QUEStionable status sum bit The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1 A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status wh...

Page 428: ... OPC exactly when all previous commands have been executed 1 This bit is not used 2 Query Error This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having send a query or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument instead The cause is often a query which is faulty and hence cannot be executed 3 Device dependent Error This bi...

Page 429: ...ming a calibration 1 to 7 These bits are not used 8 HardCOPy in progress This bit is set while the instrument is printing a hardcopy 9 SCAN results available This bit is set when a block of scan results is available Must be enabled by TRAC FEED CONT ALWays 10 Sweep Break This bit is set when end of sweep range is reached spurious measurement mode analyzer Command INIT CONM has to be used to procee...

Page 430: ...aning Bit No Meaning 0 ADJ UPPer FAIL Screen A This bit is set if in screen A the limit is exceeded in the upper adjacent channel 1 ADJ LOWer FAIL Screen A This bit is set if in screen A the limit is exceeded in the lower adjacent channel 2 ALT1 UPPer FAIL Screen A This bit is set if in screen A the limit is exceeded in the upper 1st alternate channel 3 ALT1 LOWer FAIL Screen A This bit is set if ...

Page 431: ...st alternate channel 12 ALT2 UPPer FAIL Screen B This bit is set if in screen B the limit is exceeded in the upper 2nd alternate channel 13 ALT2 LOWer FAIL Screen B This bit is set if in screen B the limit is exceeded in the lower 2nd alternate channel 14 This bit is not used 15 This bit is always set to 0 Bit No Meaning Bit No Meaning 0 OVEN COLD This bit is set if the reference oscillator has no...

Page 432: ...tion and STATus QUEStionable LIMit 1 2 EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 LIMit 1 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 1 is violated 1 LIMit 2 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 2 is violated 2 LIMit 3 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 3 is violated 3 LIMit 4 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 4 is violated 4 LIMit 5 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 5 is violated 5 LIMit 6 FAIL This bit is set if limit line ...

Page 433: ...d STATus QUEStionable LMAR gin 1 2 EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 LMARgin 1 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 1 is violated 1 LMARgin 2 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 2 is violated 2 LMARgin 3 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 3 is violated 3 LMARgin 4 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 4 is violated 4 LMARgin 5 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 5 is violated 5 LMARgin 6 FAIL This bit is ...

Page 434: ...s overloaded OVLD or IFOVL and the Trace Modes AVERAGE MAXHOLD or MINHOLD are active OVTRC will then be displayed This bit only clears if the sweep is started again A temporary overload will therefore be detected e g if the overload condition occurs only on sweep number 10 of 1000 during the average process 4 to 7 not used 8 OVERload Screen B This bit is set if the RF input is overloaded OVLD will...

Page 435: ...s set when subrange 1 is attained 1 Range 2 This bit is set when subrange 2 is attained 2 Range 3 This bit is set when subrange 3 is attained 3 Range 4 This bit is set when subrange 4 is attained 4 Range 5 This bit is set when subrange 5 is attained 5 Range 6 This bit is set when subrange 6 is attained 6 Range 7 This bit is set when subrange 71 is attained 7 Range 8 This bit is set when subrange 8...

Page 436: ... ESB After its settings have been completed the instrument generates an SRQ The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should set the instrument in a way that a service request is initi ated in the case of malfunction The program should react appropriately to the ser vice request A detailed example for a service request routine is to be f...

Page 437: ...e registers What is returned is always a number which represents the bit pattern of the register queried Evaluat ing this number is effected by the controller program Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the SRQ 5 7 4 5 Error Queue Query Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue The entries of the error que...

Page 438: ...n a command line i e immediately following a PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR clears the output buffer Event Switching on supply voltage DCL SDC Device Clear Selected Device Clear RST or SYSTem PRESet STATus PRESet CLS Power On Status Clear Effect 0 1 Clear STB ESR yes yes Clear SRE ESE yes Clear PPE yes Clear EVENTt parts of the registers yes yes Clear Enable parts of all OPERation and QUEStionable reg...

Page 439: ...R S ESU Remote Control Basics Status Reporting System 5 34 Operating Manual 1302 6163 12 03 ...

Page 440: ...FUNCtion Subsystem 6 51 6 52 4 2CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion HARMonics Subsystem 6 62 6 52 4 3CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer Subsystem 6 65 6 52 4 4CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion STRack Subsystem 6 73 6 52 4 5CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion SUMMary Subsystem 6 75 6 52 5 CALCulate MATH Subsystem 6 87 6 52 6 CALCulate PEAKsearch I PSEarch Subsystem 6 89 6 52 7 CALCulate STATistics Subsystem 6 91 6 52 8 CALCulate...

Page 441: ...TATus Subsystem 6 226 6 66 SYSTem Subsystem 6 235 6 67 TRACe Subsystem 6 246 6 67 1 General Trace Commands 6 246 6 67 2 Number and Format of the Measurement Values for the Different Operating Modes 6 248 6 67 3 TRACe IQ Subsystem 6 251 6 68 TRIGger Subsystem 6 260 6 69 UNIT Subsystem 6 262 6 70 GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE 8566A B 8568A B and 8594E 6 263 6 70 1 Introduction 6 263 6 70 2 Comman...

Page 442: ... 6 70 6 Model Dependent Default Settings 6 287 6 70 7 Data Output Formats 6 287 6 70 8 Trace Data Output Formats 6 288 6 70 9 Trace Data Input Formats 6 288 6 70 10 GPIB Status Reporting 6 288 6 71 Differences in GPIB Behavior between the FSP and the FSE Families of Instruments 6 289 ...

Page 443: ...m on page 6 98 DIAGnostic Subsystem on page 6 100 DISPlay Subsystem on page 6 104 FORMat Subsystem on page 6 114 HCOPy Subsystem on page 6 115 INITiate Subsystem on page 6 125 INPut Subsystem on page 6 129 INSTrument Subsystem on page 6 134 MMEMory Subsystem on page 6 138 OUTPut Subsystem on page 6 151 SENSe Subsystem on page 6 152 SOURce Subsystem on page 6 220 STATus Subsystem on page 6 226 SYST...

Page 444: ...her the command has only one query form whether the command is implemented only with a certain option of the instrument Indentations The different levels of the SCPI command hierarchy are repre sented in the table by means of indentations to the right The lower the level the further the indentation to the right Please note that the complete notation of the command always includes the higher levels...

Page 445: ...DISPlay FORMat FULL SPLit If parameter FULL is selected full screen is displayed in the case of SPLit split screen is displayed Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header cf chapter Remote Control Basics section Optional key words on page 5 11 The full command length must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of com patibility with the SCPI standards Parameters in sq...

Page 446: ...gest possible value DEFault This key word is used to reset the parameter to its default value UP This key word increments the parameter value DOWN This key word decrements the parameter value The numeric values associated to MAXimum MINimum DEFault can be queried by adding the corresponding key words to the command They must be entered fol lowing the quotation mark Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer M...

Page 447: ...nsition parts of the registers It clears the output buffer ESE 0 to 255 EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the event status enable register to the value indicated The query form ESE returns the contents of the event status enable register in decimal form ESR STANDARD EVENT STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form 0 to 255 and subsequently sets the register to zero Comma...

Page 448: ...asics OPC OPERATION COMPLETE QUERY writes message 1 into the output buffer as soon as all preceding commands have been executed cf chapter Remote Control Basics OPT OPTION IDENTIFICATION QUERY checks which options the instrument contains and returns a list of installed options The individual options are separated by commas Position Option 1 implemented Audio Demodulator 2 R S FSU B4 OCXO 3 impleme...

Page 449: ...d in the description of the commands SRE 0 to 255 SERVICE REQUEST ENABLE sets the service request enable register to the indicated value Bit 6 MSS mask bit remains 0 This command determines under which conditions a service request is generated The query form SRE reads the contents of the service request enable register in decimal form Bit 6 is always 0 STB READ STATUS BYTE QUERY reads out the cont...

Page 450: ...r being aborted All commands trigger events and therefore they have no RST value ABORt This command aborts a current measurement and resets the trigger system Example ABOR INIT IMM Characteristics RST value 0 SCPI conform Mode R A HOLD This command interrupts a current scan measurement The scan is resumed by INITiate 1 2 IMMediate on page 6 126 Example HOLD interrupts the current scan measurement ...

Page 451: ...ate2 Screen B For commands without suffix screen A is selected automatically Full Screen The settings are valid for the measurement window selected with the numeric suffix They become effective as soon as the corresponding measurement window has been selected as active measurement window using the command DISPLay WIN Dow 1 2 SELect Triggering measurements and querying measured values is possible o...

Page 452: ...cted via CALCulate1 screen A or 2 screen B Example CALC DELT3 ON Switches marker 3 in screen A to delta marker mode Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific Mode R A CALCulate 1 2 DELTamarker 1 4 MODE ABSolute RELative This command switches between relative and absolute frequency input of the delta marker or time with span 0 It affects all delta markers independent of the measurement win...

Page 453: ... CALCulate DELTamarker MODE If the reference fixed measurement CALCulate DELTamarker FUNCtion FIXed STATe ON is active relative values refer to the reference position are entered The query always returns absolute values Example CALC DELT MOD REL Switches the input for all delta markers to relative to marker 1 CALC DELT2 X 10 7MHz Positions delta marker 2 in screen A 10 7 MHz to the right of marker...

Page 454: ... Dimensionless output Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 in screen A INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 in screen A Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A CALCulate 1 2 DELTamarker 1 4 MAXimum PEAK This command positions the specified delta marker to the cu...

Page 455: ...EFT Sets delta marker 1 in screen A to the next smaller maximum value to the left of the current value Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query CALCulate 1 2 DELTamarker 1 4 MINimum PEAK This command positions the specified delta marker to the current minimum value of the trace The corresponding delta marker will b...

Page 456: ...alue SCPI device specific Mode R A This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query CALCulate 1 2 DELTamarker 1 4 LINK ON OFF This command switches on and off a link of delta marker 1 to marker 1 If the link is switched on and the x axis value of the marker 1 is changed the delta marker 1 will follow on the same x position The suffix at DELTamarker can only be 1 or not present ...

Page 457: ...vice specific Mode A This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query CALCulate 1 2 DELTamarker 1 4 FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y numeric_value This command defines a new reference point level for all delta markers in the selected measurement window for a measurement with fixed reference point CALCulate DELTamarker FUNCtion FIXed STATe ON For phase noise measurements CALCulate DELTam...

Page 458: ... of a drifting source whilst phase noise measurement The delta marker 2 which shows the phase noise measurement result keeps the delta frequency value Therefore the phase noise measurement in a certain offset is valid although the source is drifting Only when the marker 2 is reaching the border of the span the delta marker value is adjusted to be within the span Choose a larger span in such situat...

Page 459: ... the reference level to 30 dBm Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific Mode A CALCulate 1 2 DELTamarker 1 4 FUNCtion PNOise RESult This command queries the result of the phase noise measurement in the selected measurement window The measurement will be switched on if necessary Example CALC DELT FUNC PNO RES Outputs the result of phase noise measurement of the selected delta marker in sc...

Page 460: ...rch AUTO ON OFF This command activates or deactivates the list evaluation of the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement Example CALC ESP PSE AUTO OFF Deactivates the list evaluation Characteristics RST value ON SCPI device specific Mode A CALCulate 1 2 ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch MARGin 200dB 200dB This command sets the margin used for the limit check peak search of the Spectrum Emission Mask measure...

Page 461: ...n also be given for each line max 40 characters Example analyzer mode Definition and use of a new limit line 5 for trace 2 in screen A and trace 1 in screen B with the following features upper limit line absolute x axis in the frequency domain 5 ref values 126 MHz 40 dB 127 MHz 40 dB 128 MHz 20 dB 129 MHz 40 dB 130 MHz 40 dB relative y axis with unit dB absolute threshold value at 35 dBm no safety...

Page 462: ... RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A This command is a query only and therefore has no RST value CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 CATalog This command queries all the names of the limit lines saved on the hard disc Up to 8 limit lines can be defined at the same time The numeric suffixes 1 2 of CALCulate indicate the measurement window Return value The syntax of the return values is sum of file length o...

Page 463: ...ine The definition is valid regardless of the measurement window DBxx_MHZ indicates the units dBxx MHz and DBxx_MMHZ indicates the units dBxx mMHz the measured level is referenced to a 1 MHz bandwidth Specification of the DB unit automatically switches the limit line over to relative mode Units other than DB cause the limit line to switch over to absolute mode Example CALC LIM4 UNIT DBUV Sets the ...

Page 464: ...he limit line selected max 40 characters Up to 8 limit lines can be defined at the same time The comment is independent from the measurement window Example CALC LIM5 COMM Upper limit for spectrum Defines the comment for limit line 5 Characteristics RST value blank comment SCPI device specific Mode R A CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 COPY 1 to 8 name This command copies one limit line onto another one Up t...

Page 465: ...t the same time The command is independent of the measurement window Example CALC LIM1 NAME FM1 Assigns the name FM1 to limit line 1 Characteristics RST value REM1 to REM8 for lines 1 to 8 SCPI device specific Mode R A CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 DELete This command deletes the selected limit line Up to 8 limit lines can be defined at the same time The command is independent of the measurement window ...

Page 466: ... noted that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the absolute limit value defined with CALCulate LIMit ACPower ACHannel ABSolute This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as defined in mobile radio standards The numeric suffixes 1 8 are irrelevant for this command Parameter The first numeric value is ...

Page 467: ...aracteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific Mode A CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 ACPower ACHannel ABSolute 200DBM to 200DBM 200 to 200DBM This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower upper adjacent channel during adjacent channel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power in the selected measurement window It should be noted that the absolute limit value has no effect on the limit chec...

Page 468: ...en A for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement in screen A CALC LIM ACP ACH REL STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for adjacent channels in screen A CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS STAT ON Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the adjacent channels in sc...

Page 469: ...measured channel power The numeric suffix after ALTernate 1 to 11 denotes the alternate channel The numeric suffixes 1 8 are irrelevant for this command It should be noted that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the absolute limit defined with CALCulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate 1 to 11 ABSolute This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute ba...

Page 470: ...d CALC LIM ACP ALT RES Queries the limit check result in the second alternate adjacent channels in screen A Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific Mode A CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 ACPower ALTernate 1 to 11 ABSolute 200DBM to 200DBM 200DBM to 200DBM This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower upper alternate adjacent channel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power in the ...

Page 471: ...it value in screen A for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement in screen A CALC LIM ACP ACH REL STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for the alternative adjacent channels in screen A CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS STAT ON Switches on the check of abso...

Page 472: ... A for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement in screen A CALC LIM ACP ALT STAT ON Switches on the limit check for the adjacent channels in screen A INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ALT RES Queries the limit check result i...

Page 473: ...LIM2 CONT 1MHz 30MHz 100MHz 300MHz 1GHz Defines 5 reference values for the x axis of limit line 2 CALC LIM2 CONT Outputs the reference values for the x axis of limit line 2 separated by a comma Characteristics RST value LIMit STATe is set to OFF SCPI conform Mode R A CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 CONTrol DOMain FREQuency TIME This command defines the frequency or time domain for the x axis values Exampl...

Page 474: ...by means of an additive offset The shift is independent of the measurement window In analyzer mode the unit of values depends on the frequency or time domain of the x axis i e it is HZ with CALC LIM CONT DOM FREQ and S with CALC LIM CONT DOM TIME In analyzer mode the unit of values depends on the frequency or time domain of the x axis i e it is HZ with CALC LIM CONT DOM FREQ and S with CALC LIM CO...

Page 475: ...IT is automatically used If the measured values are smaller than the LOWer limit line the limit check signals errors In analyzer mode the units DEG RAD S HZ PCT are not available Example CALC LIM2 LOW 30 40 10 40 30 Defines 5 lower limit values for limit line 2 in the preset unit CALC LIM2 LOW Outputs the lower limit values of limit line 2 separated by a comma Characteristics RST value LIMit STATe...

Page 476: ...t window Example CALC LIM LOW MARG 10dB Characteristics RST value 0 SCPI device specific Mode A CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 LOWer MODE RELative ABSolute This command selects the relative or absolute scaling for the y axis of the selected lower limit line The setting is independent of the measurement window Selecting RELative causes the unit to be switched to DB Example CALC LIM LOW MODE REL Defines th...

Page 477: ... absolute threshold value for limit lines with relative y axis scaling independently of the measurement window The absolute threshold value is used in the limit check as soon as it exceeds the relative limit value The unit must correspond to the unit selected with CALC LIM UNIT except dB which is not allowed If no unit is indicated the unit defined with CALC LIM UNIT is automatically used exceptio...

Page 478: ... LIM UNIT is automatically used In analyzer mode the limit check signals errors if the measured values exceed the UPPer limit line Example CALC LIM2 UPP 10 0 0 10 5 Defines 5 upper limit values for limit line 2 in the preset unit CALC LIM2 UPP Outputs the upper limit values for limit line 2 separated by a comma Characteristics RST value LIMit STATe is set to OFF SCPI conform Mode R A CALCulate 1 2...

Page 479: ... 10dB Defines the margin of limit line 2 to 10 dB below the limit value Characteristics RST value 0 SCPI device specific Mode R A CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 UPPer MODE RELative ABSolute This command selects the relative or absolute scaling for the y axis of the selected upper limit line The setting is independent of the measurement window Selecting RELative causes the unit to be switched to DB Exampl...

Page 480: ... threshold value for limit lines with relative y axis scaling independently of the measurement window The absolute threshold value is used in the limit check as soon as it exceeds the relative limit value The unit must correspond to the unit selected with CALC LIM UNIT except dB which is not possible If no unit is indicated the unit defined with CALC LIM UNIT is automatically used exception dBm in...

Page 481: ...RKer 1 4 AOFF This command switches off all active markers in the indicated measurement window All delta markers and active marker delta marker measurement functions are also switched off Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers in screen A Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 TR...

Page 482: ...ple CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches on search limitation in screen A Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific Mode R A CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 X SLIMits LEFT 0 to MAX frequency sweep time This command sets the left limit of the search range for markers and delta markers in the selected measurement window Depending on the x axis domain the indicated value defines frequency span 0 time span ...

Page 483: ...Culate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 COUNt ON OFF This command switches on or off the frequency counter at the marker position in the selected measurement window The count result is queried with CALCulate MARKer COUNt FREQuency Frequency counting is possible only for one marker at a time for each measurement window If it is activated for another marker it is automatically de activated for the previous marker It ...

Page 484: ...ter should be switched on and a complete measurement performed to obtain a valid count result Therefore a single sweep with synchronization must be performed between switching on the frequency counter and querying the count result Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 in screen A CALC MARK2 COUN ON Switches the frequency counter for marker 2 INIT WAI S...

Page 485: ...RK LOEX ON Characteristics RST value ON SCPI device specific Mode A F CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 Y This command queries the measured value of the selected marker in the indicated measurement window The corresponding marker is activated before or switched to marker mode if necessary To obtain a valid query result a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end must be performed between the act...

Page 486: ...he maximum value of the trace Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 MAXimum NEXT This command positions the specified marker to the next smaller maximum value of the corresponding trace Example CALC MARK2 MAX NEXT Positions marker 2 in screen A to the next lower maximum value Characteris...

Page 487: ...EFT Positions marker 2 in screen A to the next lower maximum value to the left of the current value Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 MAXimum AUTO ON OFF This command switches an automatic maximum peak search for marker 1 at the end of each particular sweep on and off The current mar...

Page 488: ...er is activated first or switched to marker mode if necessary Example CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 in screen A to the minimum value of the trace Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 MINimum NEXT This command positions the specified marker to the next higher minimum value of the cor...

Page 489: ...he next higher minimum value to the left of the current value Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 PEXCursion numeric_value This command defines the peak excursion i e the spacing below a trace maximum which must be attained before a new maximum is recognized or the spacing above a trac...

Page 490: ...ort mode to increasing X values CALC MARK FUNC FPE 3 searches the 3 highest maxima for trace 1 CALC MARK FUNC COUN queries the number of maxima found CALC MARK FUNC Y queries the level of maxima found CALC MARK FUNC X queries the frequencies span 0 or time span 0 of maxima found Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode A CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt This query reads ou...

Page 491: ...me span 0 of the maxima found Return value 107 5E6 153 8E6 187 9E6 frequencies in increasing order 2 05E 3 2 37E 3 3 71e 3 times in increasing order Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode A CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion FPEaks Y This query reads out the list of X values of the maxima found The number of available values can be queried with CALC MARK FUNC FPEaks COUNt With sort mod...

Page 492: ...nce marker The numeric suffix 1 4 is irrelevant for this command The temporary markers T1 and T2 are positioned by n dB below the active reference marker The frequency spacing of these markers can be queried with CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion NDBDown RESult If a negative value is entered than the markers are placed n dB above the active reference marker This is then a n dB up function which can be use...

Page 493: ...haracteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode A This command is only a query and therefore has no RST value CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency This command queries the two frequencies of the N dB down marker in the selected measurement window The numeric suffix 1 4 is irrelevant for this command The two frequency values are separated by comma and output in ascending order A c...

Page 494: ...NDBD ON Switches on the N dB Down function in screen A INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD TIME Outputs the time values of the temporary markers in screen A Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode A T This command is a query only and thus has no RST value CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion ZOOM numeric_value The frequency at the marker position becomes the ...

Page 495: ...n and querying the measured value in order to obtain a valid query result This is only possible in single sweep mode Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches on marker 2 in screen A CALC MARK2 FUNC NOIS ON Switches on noise measurement for marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK2 FUNC NOIS RES Outputs the noise result of marker 2 in screen...

Page 496: ... is independent of the measurement window and the selected marker i e the suffixes 1 2 and 1 4 are irrelevant Example CALC MARK FUNC DEM HOLD 3s Characteristics RST value DEModulation is set to OFF SCPI device specific Mode A CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion DEModulation CONTinuous ON OFF This command switches on or off the continuous demodulation in the frequency domain span 0 in the selected me...

Page 497: ...the adjacent maxima of the trace If the position of delta marker 2 is changed delta marker 3 is moved symmetrically with respect to the reference marker marker 1 If the position of delta marker 3 is changed fine adjustment can be performed independently of delta marker 2 The R S ESU calculates the power at the marker positions from the measured levels The AM modulation depth is calculated from the...

Page 498: ... Outputs the measured value of screen A Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode A This command is only a query and therefore has no RST value CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion TOI STATe ON OFF This command initiates the measurement of the third order intercept point A two tone signal with equal carrier levels is expected at the RF input of the instrument Marker 1 and marker 2 both norm...

Page 499: ...on the function and querying the measured value to obtain a valid query result This is only possible in single sweep mode The numeric suffix 1 4 of MARKer is irrelevant of this command Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC TOI ON Switches the intercept measurement in screen A INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC TOI RES Outputs the measured valu...

Page 500: ...e receiver frequency to the same value as the frequency of marker 2 Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A F This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion REFerence This command sets the reference level to the power measured by the indicated marker If the selected marker was used as delta marker it is switched to marker mode...

Page 501: ...RKer 1 4 FUNCtion HARMonics BANDwidth LIST This command returns the resolution bandwidth values used by the harmonic measurment A separate value for every harmonic frequency is automatically calculated It is possible to query the calculated values with this command The function is independent of the marker selection i e the suffix 1 2 or 1 to 4 of CALCulate or MARKer is irrelevant Example CALC MAR...

Page 502: ...ant Example CALC MARK FUNC HARM PRES Optimizes the device setting for the measurement of harmonics Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query Mode A F A T CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion HARMonics DISTortion TOTal This command queries the results of the total harmonic distortion THD A complete sweep with synchronization to ...

Page 503: ...C HARM NHARM A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end should be performed between switching on the function and querying the measured value to obtain a valid query result This is only possible in the single sweep mode The function is independent of the marker selection i e the suffix 1 2 or 1 4 of CALCulate or MARKer is irrelevant Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC ...

Page 504: ...t to 1 unless adjacent channel power measurement is switched on already This command is a query and therefore has no RST value The occupied bandwidth measurement is performed for the trace on which marker 1 is positioned To select another trace for the measurement marker 1 is to be positioned on the desired trace by means of CALC MARK TRAC 1 2 3 Parameter ACPower adjacent channel power measurement...

Page 505: ...annel 2 The number of measured values returned depends on the number of adjacent alternate channels selected with SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs With logarithmic scaling RANGE LOG the power is output in the currently selected level unit with linear scaling RANGE LIN dB or LIN the power is output in W If SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE REL is selected the adjacent alternate channel power is output in dB AO...

Page 506: ...ernate channel 2 The number of measured values returned depends on the number of carrier signals and adjacent alternate channels selected with SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt and SENSe POWer ACHan nel ACPairs If only one carrier signal is measured the total value of all carrier signals will not be output With logarithmic scaling RANGE LOG the power is output in dBm with linear scaling RANGE L...

Page 507: ...mission channel and alternate channel 1 to 60 kHz and the spacing between the transmission channel and alternate channel 2 to 90 kHz SENS2 POW ACH SPAC ALT1 100KHZ Sets the spacing between the transmission channel and alternate channel 1 to 100 kHz and the spacing between the transmission channel and alternate channel 2 to 150 kHz SENS2 POW ACH SPAC ALT2 140KHZ Sets the spacing between the transmi...

Page 508: ...width of the main channel to 30 kHz SENS2 POW ACH BAND ACH 40KHZ Sets the bandwidth of all adjacent channels to 40 kHz SENS2 POW ACH BAND ALT1 50KHZ Sets the bandwidth of all alternate adjacent channels to 50 kHz SENS2 POW ACH BAND ALT2 60KHZ Sets the bandwidth of alternate adjacent channel 2 to 60 kHz SENS2 POW ACH SPAC 30KHZ Sets the spacing between channel and adjacent chan nel as well as betwe...

Page 509: ...RIS95C0 FJ008 RJ008 FIS95C1 RIS95C1 TCDMa NONE AWLan BWLan WIMax WIBro EUTRa REUTra string This command selects the power measurement setting for a standard in the indicated measurement window and previously switches on the corresponding measurement if required The function is independent of the marker selection i e the numeric suffix 1 4 of MARKer is irrelevant The configuration for a standard co...

Page 510: ...IBro WiMAX WiBro Wireless Broadband IEEE 802 16 2004 Cor1 2005 EUTRa E UTRA LTE Square Use this standard setting to measure the assumed adjacent channel carrier configuration E UTRA of same BW In this mode on all channels a square filter is applied REUTra E UTRA LTE Square RRC Use this standard setting to measure the assumed adjacent channel carrier configuration 1 28 3 84 7 68 Mcps UTRA In this m...

Page 511: ...ALC MARK FUNC POW STAN SAVE my_acp_std save as ACP USER standard my_acp_std CALC MARK FUNC POW STAN DEL my_acp_std delete the user standard my_acp_std Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode A CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion POWer STANdard SAVE file_name This command saves the current ACP settings as an ACP user standard The numeric suffixes at MARKer are irrelevant for this command ...

Page 512: ...e bandwidth around the center frequency within which the largest signal is searched The function is independent of the selected marker i e the numeric suffix 1 4 of MARKer is irrelevant It is only available in the frequency domain span 0 Example CALC MARK FUNC STR BAND 1MHZ Sets the search bandwidth for screen A to 1 MHz CALC MARK FUNC STR BWID 1MHZ Alternative command for the same function Charac...

Page 513: ...o 3 This command defines the trace on which the largest signal is searched for in the selected measurement window The function is independent of the selected marker i e the numeric suffix 1 4 of MARKer is irrelevant It is only available in the frequency domain span 0 Example CALC2 MARK FUNC STR TRAC 3 Defines trace 3 in screen B as the trace for signal tracking Characteristics RST value 1 SCPI dev...

Page 514: ...the positive peak value in the selected measurement window The function is independent of the marker selection i e the numeric suffix 1 4 of MARKer is irrelevant It is only available in the time domain span 0 Example CALC MARK FUNC SUMM PPE ON Switches on the function in screen A Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific Mode A T CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion SUMMary PPEak RESult This...

Page 515: ...dependent of the marker selection i e the numeric suffix 1 4 in MARKer is irrelevant It is only available in the time domain span 0 A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the function and querying the measured value to obtain a valid query result This is only possible in single sweep mode Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MA...

Page 516: ... for the end CALC MARK FUNC SUMM PPE PHOL RES Outputs the result of screen A Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode A T This command is only a query and therefore has no RST value CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion SUMMary RMS STATe ON OFF This command switches on or off the measurement of the effective RMS power in the selected measurement window If necessary the function is switched ...

Page 517: ... been activated previously using CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion SUMMary AVERage ON The function is independent of the marker selection i e the numeric suffix 1 4 of MARKer is irrelevant It is only available in the time domain span 0 A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the function and querying the measured value to obtain a valid query result This i...

Page 518: ...ches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC SUMM RMS ON Switches on the function in screen A CALC MARK FUNC SUMM PHOL ON Switches on the peak value measurement in screen A INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC SUMM RMS PHOL RES Outputs the result of screen A Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode A T This command is only a query and therefore has no RST value CALCu...

Page 519: ...a query and therefore has no RST value CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN AVERage RESult This command queries the result of the measurement of the averaged mean value in the selected measurement window The query is only possible if averaging has been activated previously using CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion SUMMary AVERage The function is independent of the marker selection i e the ...

Page 520: ...ly possible in single sweep mode Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC SUMM MEAN ON Switches on the function in screen A CALC MARK FUNC SUMM PHOL ON Switches on the peak value measurement in screen A INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC SUMM MEAN PHOL RES Outputs the result of screen A Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode A T This...

Page 521: ...mmand is only a query and therefore has no RST value CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation AVERage RESult This command queries the result of the averaged standard deviation determined in several sweeps in the selected measurement window The query is possible only if averaging is active The function is independent of the marker selection i e the numeric suffix 1 4 of MARKer is irrele...

Page 522: ...ALC MARK FUNC SUMM SDEV ON Switches on the function in screen A CALC MARK FUNC SUMM PHOL ON Switches on the peak value measurement in screen A INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC SUMM SDEV PHOL RES Outputs the result of screen A Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode A T This command is only a query and therefore has no RST value CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCt...

Page 523: ...o single sweep mode CALC2 MARK FUNC SUMM AVER ON Switches on the calculation of average in screen B AVER COUN 200 Sets the measurement counter to 200 INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific Mode A T CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion SUMMary MODE ABSolute RELative This command selects absolute or relative time domain power measurement in the ...

Page 524: ...nd no query CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion SUMMary AOFF This command switches off all time domain measurements in the selected measurement window The function is independent of the marker selection i e the numeric suffix 1 4 of MARKer is irrelevant It is only available in the time domain span 0 Example CALC2 MARK FUNC SUMM AOFF Switches off the time domain power measurement functions in screen ...

Page 525: ... 1MHz VID 3MHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz and the video bandwidth to 3 MHz DET RMS Sets the RMS detector TRIG SOUR VID LEV VID 50 PCT Selects the trigger source VIDeo and sets the level of the video trigger source to 50 PCT SWE TIME 50ms Sets the sweep time to 50 ms INIT WAI Starts the measurement with synchronization CALC MARK FUNC MSUM 50US 450US 576 9US 8 Queries 8 bursts with an of...

Page 526: ...CE2 Selects the subtraction of trace 1 from trace 2 in screen A CALC2 MATH TRACE1 TRACE3 Selects the subtraction of trace 1 from trace 3 in screen B Characteristics RST value SCPI conform Mode A T CALCulate 1 2 MATH POSition 100PCT to 200PCT This command defines the position of the result of the trace mathematics in the selected measurement window The indication is in of the screen height with 100...

Page 527: ...near or logarithmic video calculation of the mathematical functions related to the traces The calculation of the average is one of the affected functions The setting is valid for all measurement windows i e the numeric suffix 1 2 of CALCulate is irrelevant Example CALC MATH MODE LIN Switches on the linear calculation Characteristics RST value LOG SCPI device specific Mode A T ...

Page 528: ...meric value This command adds a frequency value to the peaklist in receiver mode RECEIVER FINAL MEAS EDIT PEAK LIST Only frequencies in the currently displayed frequency range of the receiver scan are allowed Example CALC PEAK ADD 93MHz The frequency 93 MHz as added to the peak list Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R CALCulate 1 2 PEAKsearch PSEarch CLEar IMMediate The peaklist ...

Page 529: ...c Mode A R CALCulate 1 2 PEAKsearch PSEarch SUBRanges 1 to 500 This command defines the number of subranges for the peak search The numeric suffix in CALCULATE 1 2 is not significant Example CALC PEAK SUBR 10 Characteristics RST value 25 SCPI device specific Mode A R CALCulate 1 2 PEAKsearch PSEarch METHod SUBRange PEAK This command defines the method that is used to determine the level maxima of ...

Page 530: ...Culate STATistics CCDF STATe ON OFF This command switches on or off the measurement of the complementary cumulative distribution function CCDF On activating this function the APD measurement is switched off Example CALC STAT CCDF ON Switches on the CCDF measurement Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific Mode A CALCulate STATistics CCDF X 1 3 P0_01 P0_1 P1 P10 This command reads out the...

Page 531: ...power for the CCDF measurement In addition the probability scale for the number of test points is adapted Example CALC STAT SCAL AUTO ONCE WAI Adapts the level setting for statistical measurements and activates the synchronization Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode A This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query CALCulate STATistics SCALe X RLEVel 130dBm to ...

Page 532: ...CALC STAT SCAL Y UNIT PCT toggle to percentage Characteristics RST value ABS SCPI device specific Mode A CALCulate STATistics SCALe Y UPPer 1E 8 to 1 0 This command defines the upper limit for the y axis of the diagram in statistical measurements Since probabilities are specified on the y axis the entered numerical values are dimensionless Example CALC STAT Y UPP 0 01 Characteristics RST value 1 0...

Page 533: ...d via the following parameters Parameter MEAN Average RMS power in dBm measured during the measurement time PEAK Peak power in dBm measured during the measurement time CFACtor Determined CREST factor ratio of peak power to average power in dB ALL Results of all three measurements mentioned before separated by commas mean power peak power crest factor Example CALC STAT RES2 ALL Reads out the three ...

Page 534: ...s command switches Display Line 1 or 2 level lines on or off Example CALC DLIN2 STAT OFF Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific Mode R A CALCulate 1 2 THReshold MINimum to MAXimum depending on current unit This command defines the threshold value for the maximum minimum search of markers with marker search functions MAX PEAK NEXT PEAK etc in the selected measurement window The associat...

Page 535: ...e 1 2 FLINe 1 2 STATe ON OFF This command switches the frequency line on or off Example CALC FLIN2 STAT ON Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific Mode R A F CALCulate 1 2 TLINe 1 2 0 to 1000s This command defines the position of the time lines The time lines mark the times specified in the measurement window Time lines are only available with SPAN 0 Example CALC TLIN 10ms Characteristi...

Page 536: ...surement settings CALCulate 1 2 UNIT POWer DBM V A W DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere DBPT DBUV_M DBUA_M This command selects the unit for power in the selected measurement window In receiver mode only the units DBUV DBUV_M DBUA DBUA_M DBPW DBPT and DBMV are available Example CALC UNIT POW DBM Sets the power unit for screen A to dBm Characteristics RST value dBm SCPI device specific Mode R A ...

Page 537: ... Enable Register the instrument generates a service request after the acquisition of correction data has been completed Example CLS Resets the status management SRE 16 Enables MAV bit in the Service Request Enable Register CAL Starts the correction data recording and then a service request is generated Characteristics RST value SCPI conform Mode R A CALibration ABORt This command aborts the acquis...

Page 538: ... Key on page 4 143 are output as string data separated by commas Return value Total Calibration Status PASSED Date dd mm yyyy 12 07 2006 Time 16 24 54 Runtime 00 06 Example CAL RES Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A CALibration STATe ON OFF This command determines whether the current calibration data are taken into account by the instrument ON or not OFF Example CAL STAT OFF S...

Page 539: ...stic 1 2 SERVice CSOource POWer command Example DIAG SERV INP CAL Selects the internal reference signal Characteristics RST value RF SCPI device specific Mode R A DIAGnostic 1 2 SERVice INPut PULSed STATe ON OFF This command toggles the calibration signal in the selected measurement window between pulsed and non pulsed The selection takes effect only if the RF input has been set to the internal re...

Page 540: ...T PRAT 128 MHz Characteristics RST value 5 kHz SCPI device specific Mode R A DIAGnostic 1 2 SERVice SFUNction string This command activates a service function which can be selected by indicating the five parameters function group number board number function number parameter 1 and parameter 2 see service manual The contents of the parameter string is identical to the code to be entered in the data...

Page 541: ... the 128 MHz reference signal source between 0 dBm and 30 dBm in the selected measurement window Example DIAG SERV CSO 0DBM Characteristics RST value 30 dBm SCPI device specific Mode R A DIAGnostic 1 2 SERVice STESt RESult This command reads the results of the selftest out of the instrument The lines of the result table are output as string data separated by commas The numeric suffix 1 2 is ignore...

Page 542: ...data and are separated by commas component 1 serial order model HWC rev sub rev component 2 serial order model HWC rev sub rev The individual columns of the table are separated from each other by The numeric suffix 1 2 is ignored with this command Example DIAG SERV HWIN Result shortened RF_ATTEN_7 650551 007 1067 7684 02 00 20 04 IF FILTER 648158 037 1093 5540 03 01 07 05 Characteristics RST value...

Page 543: ...ORM SPL Switches the display to 2 measurement windows Characteristics RST value SINGle SCPI device specific Mode R A DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency ON OFF This command switches the x axis annotation on or off Example DISP ANN FREQ OFF Characteristics RST value ON SCPI conform Mode R A DISPlay LOGO ON OFF This command switches the company logo on the screen on or off Example DISP LOGO OFF Characteris...

Page 544: ...s irrelevant Example DISP CMAP DEF2 Selects default setting 2 for setting the colors Characteristics RST value SCPI conform Mode R A This command is an event and therefore has no query and no RST value DISPlay CMAP 1 34 HSL hue sat lum This command defines the color table of the instrument Each numeric suffix of CMAP is assigned one or several graphical elements which can be modified by varying th...

Page 545: ... CMAP is assigned one or several graphical elements which can be modified by varying the corresponding color setting The same assignment as for DISPlay CMAP 1 to 26 HSL applies Example DISP CMAP2 PDEF GRE Characteristics RST value SCPI conform Mode R A The values set are not changed by RST CMAP17 Table selected field text CMAP18 Table selected field background CMAP19 Table data entry field opaque ...

Page 546: ...indow Initiating measurements and querying results in the inactive window yields an error message execution error In split screen mode the selection of the active window for result queries is irrelevant In full screen mode settings can also be performed in the inactive measurement window They become effective as soon as the corresponding window becomes active Example DISP WIND2 SEL Selects screen ...

Page 547: ... the title of screen B Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI conform Mode R A DISPlay WINDow 1 2 TIME ON OFF This command switches on or off the screen display of date and time The numeric suffix in WINDow 1 2 is irrelevant Example DISP TIME ON Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific Mode R A DISPlay WINDow 1 2 TRACe 1 3 X SPACing LINear LOGarithmic This command toggles between linear and ...

Page 548: ...ic Mode R A DISPlay WINDow 1 2 TRACe 1 3 Y SCALe RLEVel 130dBm to 30dBm This command defines the reference level in the selected measurement window Depending on the coupling of the measurement windows it is valid for both screens or only for the selected measurement window INSTrument COUPle The unit depends on the setting defined with the CALCulate 1 2 UNIT POWer command The numeric suffix at TRAC...

Page 549: ...TWORK mode SCPI device specific Mode A DISPlay WINDow 1 2 TRACe 1 to 3 Y SCALe RPOSition 0 to 100PCT This command defines the position of the reference value in the selected measurement window The numeric suffix in TRACe 1 3 is irrelevant In NETWORK mode Tracking Generator Ext Generator Option R S FSU B9 R S FSP B10 with active normalization RPOSition defines the reference point for the output of ...

Page 550: ...IT Characteristics RST value DBM SCPI device specific Mode A DISPlay WINDow 1 2 TRACe 1 3 MODE WRITe VIEW AVERage MAXHold MINHold This command defines the type of display and the evaluation of the traces in the selected measurement window WRITE corresponds to the Clr Write mode of manual operation The trace is switched off BLANK in manual operation with the DISPlay WINDow 1 2 TRACe 1 3 STATe comma...

Page 551: ... after specific parameter changes ON The reset mechanism is switched off Example DISP WIND1 TRAC3 MODE HCON ON The reset mechanism is switched off for measurement window 1 Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific Mode A DISPlay WINDow 1 2 TRACe 1 3 STATe ON OFF This command switches on or off the display of the corresponding trace in the selected measurement window Example DISP WIND1 TRA...

Page 552: ...Play BARGraph PHOLd ON OFF This command switches the indication of the maxhold value of the bar graph measurement on or off Example DISP BARG PHOL ON Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific Mode R DISPlay BARGraph PHOLd RESet This command resets the maxhold value of the numeric indication of the bar graph measurement Example DISP BARG PHOL RES Characteristics RST value SCPI device speci...

Page 553: ...data are transmitted as 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point numbers in the definite length block format The FORMat command is valid for the transmission of trace data and the results of the bar graph measurement The data format of trace data received by the instrument is automatically recognized regardless of the format which is programmed FORMat DEXPort DSEParator POINt COMMA This command defines whic...

Page 554: ...EFault2 OPTIMIZED COLOR SET and DEFault3 USER DEFINED The numeric suffix in CMAP is not significant Example HCOP CMAP DEF2 selects OPTIMIZED COLOR SET for the color settings of a hardcopy Characteristics RST value SCPI conform Mode R A This command is an event and therefore has no query and no RST value HCOPY CMAP 1 34 HSL hue sat lum This command defines the color table in USER DEFINED COLORS mod...

Page 555: ... several picture elements which can be modified by varying the corresponding color setting The same assignment as for HCPOy CMAP 1 to 26 HSL applies Example HCOP CMAP2 PDEF GRE Characteristics RST value SCPI conform Mode R A The values set are not changed by RST CMAP15 Table softkey background CMAP16 Table softkey text CMAP17 Table selected field text CMAP18 Table selected field background CMAP19 ...

Page 556: ... selected for HCOPy DEVice LANGuage SYST COMM CLIP Directs the hardcopy to the clipboard EWMF should be selected for HCOPy DEVice LANGuage Example SYST COMM PRIN SEL2 LASER on LPT1 Selects the printer and output medium for device 2 HCOP DEST2 SYST COMM PRIN Selects the printer interface as device 2 Characteristics RST value SCPI conform Mode R A This command is an event and therefore has no RST va...

Page 557: ...o files HCOPy DEVice SYST COMM MMEM BMP is available only for HCOPY MODE SCReen HTML 4 0 Hypertext Markup Language Test reports can be exported to files in HTML format It is then possible to view these files using a web browser HTML is available only for HCOPY MODE TREPort Adobe Acrobat Portable Document Format Test reports can be exported to files in PDF format These files can then be opened usin...

Page 558: ...d tables Example HCOP ITEM WIND TABL STAT ON Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific Mode R A The command HCOPy DEVice ITEM WINDow 1 2 TABle STATe OFF as well as command HCOPy DEVice ITEM ALL enables the output of the whole screen HCOPy ITEM WINDow 1 2 TEXT string This command defines the comment text for measurement window 1 or 2 for printout with a maximum of 100 characters line feed ...

Page 559: ...st report to an existing document in accordance with the test report configuration settings This report document is initially stored internally until it is printed using the HCOPy IMMediate command or exported to a portable file format Example HCOP TREP APP Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A This command is an event so it has neither an RST value nor a query function HCOPy TRE...

Page 560: ...ONT ALW Characteristics RST value NEVer SCPI device specific Mode R A HCOPy TREPort ITEM HEADer LINE 1 7 CONTrol ALWays ONCE NEVer In the current test report configuration this command controls whether the line indicated in the numeric suffix of the report header is output The meanings are as follows A further condition for the output is that outputting of the report header must be switched on wit...

Page 561: ...n this command switches the output of the report header either on or off The individual lines can also be controlled individually with HCOP TREP ITEM HEAD LINE CONT ALW ONCE NEV Example HCOP TREP ITEM HEAD STAT ON Characteristics RST value ON SCPI device specific Mode R A HCOPy TREPort ITEM DIAGram STATe ON OFF In the current test report configuration this command switches the output of the diagra...

Page 562: ...nt test report configuration this command switches the output of the results on the preliminary measurement in tabular format either on or off Depending on the current scan settings this table can be very long in certain cases Example HCOP TREP ITEM SRES STAT ON Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific Mode R HCOPy TREPort ITEM TDSTamp STATe ON OFF In the current test report configuratio...

Page 563: ... DELete string This command deletes the specified test report configuration Example HCOP TREP ITEM TEMP DEL short test Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A HCOPy TREPort ITEM TEMPlate LOAD string This command loads the specified test report configuration Example HCOP TREP ITEM TEMP LOAD short test Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A HCOPy TREPort ITEM TEMPlat...

Page 564: ...is continuously initiated continuous or performs single measurements single Setting INITiate CONTinuous ON corresponds to function SCAN SWEEP CONTinuous i e the scan sweep of the receiver analyzer is cyclically repeated The setting INITiate CONTinuous OFF corresponds to function SCAN SWEEP SINGLE Example INIT2 CONT OFF Switches the sequence in screen B to single scan sweep INIT2 CONT ON Switches t...

Page 565: ... measurement next 20 sequences and waits for the end Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query INITiate 1 2 IMMediate The command initiates a new sweep in the indicated measurement window In receiver mode with SINGLE SCAN selected the R S ESU performs a single scan and stops at the end frequency With CONTINUOUS SCAN...

Page 566: ... behavior to OFF INIT2 WAI Starts the measurement with display switched off Characteristics RST value ON SCPI device specific Mode A INITiate 1 2 ESPectrum This command starts a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement The measurement can be stopped in continuous sweep mode with ABORt Example SENS SWE MODE ESP activates the SEM measurement INIT CONT OFF Set to Single Sweep INIT ESP Starts a SEM measurem...

Page 567: ...ent Example INIT2 EMIT Starts the sequence preliminary measurement peak search and final measurement Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R This command is an event so it has neither an RST value nor a query function INITiate 1 2 SPURious This command starts a new spurious measurement Example INIT CONT OFF switches to single sweep mode INIT SPUR WAI starts the measurement by waiting...

Page 568: ...revented by activating the protection function INPut ATTenuation PROTection ON Example INP ATT 40dB Analyzer Sets the attenuation on the attenuator to 40 dB and switches off the coupling to the reference level Receiver Sets the attenuation on the attenuator to 40 dB and switches off the auto ranging Characteristics RST value 10 dB AUTO is set to ON SCPI conform Mode R A INPut 1 2 ATTenuation AUTO ...

Page 569: ...DC This command switches the input coupling of the RF input between AC and DC Example INP COUP DC Characteristics RST value AC SCPI conform Mode R A INPut 1 2 GAIN STATe ON OFF This command switches the preamplifier for the instrument on or off The switchable gain is fixed to 20 dB In analyzer mode the command is only available if the preselector measurement has been activated Example INP GAIN STA...

Page 570: ...This command selects the setting of the Protective EARth that is controlled via the USER port In receiver mode this setting is used also for the preliminary measurement The availability depends on the selected V network Example INP LISN PEAR GRO Characteristics RST value GROunded SCPI device specific Mode R A INPut 1 2 LISN FILTer HPAS STATe ON OFF This command selects the setting for the highpass...

Page 571: ... numeric value This command defines the desired power at the input mixer of the R S ESU On any change to the reference level the RF attenuation will be adjusted in a way that makes the difference between reference level and RF attenuation come as close to the desired mixer level as possible Example INP MIX 30 Characteristics RST value 25 dBm SCPI device specific Mode A INPut 1 2 MIXer AUTO ON OFF ...

Page 572: ...ts Example INP UPOR Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A This command is a query and therefore has no RST value INPut 1 2 UPORt STATe ON OFF This command toggles the control lines of the user ports between INPut and OUTPut Example INP UPOR STAT ON Characteristics RST value ON SCPI device specific Mode R A With ON the user port is switched to INPut with OFF to OUTPut INPut 1 2 GA...

Page 573: ... between modes by entering the mode designation Parameter SANalyzer spectrum analyzer RECeiver Receiver mode IFANalyzer IF analysis mode APD Amplitude Probability Distribution Example INST SAN Switches the instrument to SPECTRUM Characteristics RST value RECeiver SCPI conform Mode R A INSTrument NSELect numeric value This command enables you to switch between the modes by using numbers Parameter 1...

Page 574: ...rement windows This leads to two independent virtual devices Characteristics RST value NONE SCPI device specific Mode A INSTrument COUPle ATTenuation ALL NONE This command couples die RF attenuation settings for the analyzer and receiver modes with one another The RF attenuation unit and level unit are then set to the same value in the analyzer and receiver screen Example INST COUP ATT ALL Charact...

Page 575: ...es gain settings for the analyzer and receiver modes with one another Example INST COUP GAIN ALL Characteristics RST value ALL SCPI device specific Mode R A INSTrument COUPle MARKer ALL NONE This command couples the frequency of the marker in spectrum analyzer mode to the receive frequency in receiver mode Example INST COUP MARK ALL Characteristics RST value NONE SCPI device specific Mode R A INST...

Page 576: ... and receiver modes with one another To prevent damage to the RF input activate this coupling Example INST COUP PROT ALL Characteristics RST value ALL SCPI device specific Mode R A INSTrument COUPle SPAN ALL NONE This command couples the start and stop frequencies of sweep and scan for the analyzer and receiver modes with one another Example INST COUP SPAN ALL Characteristics RST value NONE SCPI d...

Page 577: ...acters and have the function of so called wildcards i e they are variables for selection of several files The question mark replaces exactly one character the asterisk means any of the remaining characters in the file name thus means all files in a directory MMEMory CATalog path This command reads the indicated directory According to DOS convention wild card characters can be entered in order to q...

Page 578: ..._name This command changes the current directory In addition to the path name the indication of the directory may contain the drive name The path name complies with the DOS conventions Parameter directory_name DOS path name Example MMEM CDIR D USER DATA Returns the list of files in directory D USER DATA Characteristics RST value SCPI conform Mode R A MMEMory CLEar STATe 1 file_name This command de...

Page 579: ... path and the drive name The file names and path information must be in accordance with the DOS conventions Parameter file_source file_destination file_name file_name DOS file name Example MMEM COPY D USER DATA SETUP CFG F Characteristics RST value SCPI conform Mode R A This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query MMEMory DATA file_name block data This command writes the bl...

Page 580: ...nstrument to the control computer Characteristics RST value SCPI conform Mode R A MMEMory DELete file_name This command deletes the indicated files The indication of the file name contains the path and optionally the drive name Indication of the path complies with DOS conventions Parameter file_name DOS file name Example MMEM DEL TEST01 HCP The file TEST01 HCP is deleted Characteristics RST value ...

Page 581: ...new device state Items can be individually deselected for the recall The maximum items to be loaded are the maximum number of items stored in the data set file If items were deselected for storage thoses items cannot be recalled The file name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive name The default path for data set files is D USER CONFIG Parameter file_name DOS file name wi...

Page 582: ...ue and no query MMEMory MOVE file_source file_destination This command renames existing files if file_destination contains no path indication Otherwise the file is moved to the indicated path and stored under the file name specified there if any The file name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive The path name complies with DOS conventions Parameter file_source file_destin...

Page 583: ...n of the output device MMEM NAME PRINT1 BMP Selection of file name HCOP IMM Start of the printout Characteristics RST value SCPI conform Mode R A This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query MMEMory RDIRectory directory_name This command deletes the indicated directory The directory name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive name The path name compl...

Page 584: ...ult This command sets the default list of device settings to be stored loaded The latter includes current configuration of general device parameters general setup current setting of the measurement hardware including markers activated limit lines user defined color setting configuration for the hardcopy output activated transducers Final measurement data Tracking generator settings only in conjunc...

Page 585: ... It comprises the activated factors and if available the de activated factors last used Therefore the combination of non activated restored transducer factors depends on the sequence of use with the command MMEM LOAD Tracking generator settings only in conjunction with option Tracking Generator B9 or External Generator Control B10 Correction data for source calibration only in conjunction with opt...

Page 586: ...tracking generator option B9 or external generator control option B10 MMEMory SELect ITEM TRACe ACTive ON OFF This command adds the active traces to the list of data subsets of a save recall device setting Active traces are all traces whose state is not blank Example MMEM SEL TRAC ON Characteristics RST value OFF i e no traces will be stored SCPI device specific Mode R A MMEMory SELect ITEM TRANsd...

Page 587: ... query MMEMory STORe 1 2 PEAKlist file_name This command stores the content of the marker peak list in ASCII format to the specified file Parameter file_name DOS file name Example MMEM STOR PEAK D TEST ASC Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A MMEMory STORe 1 2 SPURious file_name This command stores the peak list in an ASCII file to a file e g on a memory stick The file has a hea...

Page 588: ...STORe 1 2 TRACe 1 to 3 file_name This command stores the selected trace in a file with ASCII format The file format is described in chapter Instrument Functions section ASCII FILE EXPORT on page 4 135 The numeric suffix at STORe 1 2 indicates the measurement window screen A or B The decimal separator decimal point or comma for floating point numerals contained in the file is defined with the FORMa...

Page 589: ... filter VBW 30000 000000 Hz Resolution bandwidth of the video filter Auto Sweep time ON Sweep time 0 145000 s Selected sweep time in the current range Detector RMS Detector MAX PEAK MIN PEAK RAVERAGE REF Level 10 000000 dBm Setting of the reference level in the current range Auto RF Attenuator OFF Manual OFF or automatic ON setting of the RF attenuator RF Att 15 000000 dB Range input attenuation S...

Page 590: ...the user port is programmed to INPut instead of OUTPut the output value is temporarily stored Example OUTP UPOR B10100101 Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A OUTPut UPORt STATe ON OFF This command switches the control line of the user ports between INPut and OUTPut The user port is switched to OUTPut with parameter ON to INPut with OFF Example OUTP UPOR STAT ON Characteristics ...

Page 591: ...ignal characteristics of the measure ment signal The SENSe subsystem controls the essential parameters of the R S ESU In accordance with the SCPI standard the key word SENSe is optional for this reason which means that it is not necessary to include the SENSe node in command sequences The measurement windows are selected by SENSe1 and SENSe2 SENSe1 Modification of screen A settings SENSe2 Modifica...

Page 592: ...tinuous sweep mode In single sweep or scan mode the scan sweep is stopped as soon as the indicated number of measurements scans sweeps is reached Synchronization to the end of the indicated number of measurements is only possible in single scan sweep mode The command SENSe 1 2 AVERage COUNt is the same as command SENSe 1 2 SWEep COUNt In both cases the number of measurements is defined whether the...

Page 593: ...nction If VIDeo is selected the logarithmic power is averaged and if LINear is selected the power values are averaged before they are converted to logarithmic values The type of average calculation is equally set for all traces in one measurement window Example AVER TYPE LIN Switches screen A to linear average calculation Characteristics RST value VIDeo SCPI device specific Mode A ...

Page 594: ... are implemented as 5 circuit LC filters in the range from 300 kHz to 10 MHz and as digital filters with analog characteristic in the range of 10 Hz to 100 kHz In addition the EMI bandwidths 200 Hz 9 kHz and 120 kHz are available 6 dB bandwidths each The 1 MHz EMI bandwidth is the impulse bandwidth The EMI bandwidths are only available when parameter PULSe is selected by command BAND TYPE FFT filt...

Page 595: ... Mode R A F SENSe 1 2 BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATio 0 0001 to 1 This command defines the ratio resolution bandwidth Hz span Hz The ratio to be entered is reciprocal to the ratio span RBW used in manual operation Example BAND RAT 0 1 Characteristics RST value 0 02 with BAND TYPE NORMal or RBW 30 kHz 0 01 with BAND TYPE FFT for RBW 30 kHz SCPI conform Mode A SENSe 1 2 BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution...

Page 596: ...width The ratio video bandwidth resolution bandwidth can be modified with the command SENSe 1 2 BANDwidth VIDeo RATio Example BAND VID AUTO OFF Characteristics RST value ON SCPI conform Mode A SENSe 1 2 BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio 0 01 to 1000 This command defines the ratio video bandwidth Hz resolution bandwidth Hz The ratio to be entered is reciprocal to the ratio RBW VBW used in manual operati...

Page 597: ...SCPI device specific Mode A SENSe 1 2 BANDwidth BWIDth PLL AUTO HIGH MEDium LOW This command defines the bandwidth of the main PLL of the instrument synthesizer Example BAND PLL HIGH Characteristics RST value AUTO SCPI device specific Mode A SENSe 1 2 BANDwidth BWIDth IF 10 Hz 100 kHz This command sets the resolution bandwidth of the IF analysis Digitally implemented resolution filters from 10 Hz ...

Page 598: ...ode A This command is only valid in conjunction with the tracking generator ext generator control option B9 B10 SENSe 1 2 CORRection METHod TRANsmission REFLection This command selects the type of measurement with active tracking generator transmission reflection Example CORR METH TRAN Sets the type of measurement in screen A to transmission Characteristics RST value TRANsmission SCPI device speci...

Page 599: ...mple CORR REC Characteristics RST value SCPI conform Mode A This command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query This command is only valid in conjunction with the tracking generator ext generator control option B9 B10 SENSe 1 2 CORRection TRANsducer ACTive This command queries the active transducer factor If no transducer factor is active an empty string is returned Example CORR T...

Page 600: ...h a maximum of 8 characters Example CORR TRAN SEL FACTOR1 Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A SENSe 1 2 CORRection TRANsducer UNIT string This command specifies the unit for the selected transducer factor Prior to this command the command SENS CORR TRAN SEL must be sent Parameter string DB DBM DBMV DBUV DBUV M DBUA DBUA M DBPW DBPT Example CORR TRAN SEL FACTOR1 CORR TRAN UNIT D...

Page 601: ...and the command SENS CORR TRAN SEL must be sent The level values are sent as dimensionless numbers the unit is specified by means of the command SENS CORR TRAN UNIT Example CORR TRAN SEL FACTOR1 CORR TRAN TRANsducer DATA 1MHZ 30 2MHZ 40 Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A SENSe 1 2 CORRection TRANsducer STATe ON OFF This command switches the selected transducer factor on or off...

Page 602: ...cteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific Mode R A SENSe 1 2 CORRection TSET SELect name This command selects the transducer set designated by name If name does not exist yet a new set is created This command must be sent prior to the subsequent commands for modifying activating transducersets Parameter name name of the transducer set in string data form with a maximum of 8 characters Example ...

Page 603: ...NSe 1 2 CORRection TSET COMMent string This command defines the comment for the selected transducer set Prior to this command the command SENS CORR TSET SEL must be sent Example CORR TSET SEL SET1 CORR TSET COMM SET FOR ANTENNA Characteristics RST value empty comment SCPI device specific Mode R A SENSe 1 2 CORRection TSET RANGe 1 to 10 freq freq name This command defines a partial range of the sel...

Page 604: ... is an event and therefore has no RST value SENSe 1 2 CORRection YIG TEMPerature AUTO ON OFF This command switches on or off the automatic correction of the YIG filter frequency drift When correction is switched on it is checked once per minute whether the temperature on the YIG filter has changed by more than 5K relative to the last instance of correction If this is the case the frequency of the ...

Page 605: ... SENSe1 screen A and SENSe2 screen B SENSe 1 2 DEMod OFF AM FM This command selects the type of analog demodulation Example DEM FM Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific Mode R SENSe 1 2 DEMod SQUelch LEVel numeric_value MIN MAX DEF This command enables the input of a level threshold below which the audible AF is cut off Example SENSe DEM SQU LEV 80 Sets the squelch level to 80 Charact...

Page 606: ...measurement point is displayed with the RMS detector The AVERage detector displays the power average value at each measurement point The detectors QPEak for quasipeak CAVerage for CISPR average and CRMS for CISPR RMS perform standard compliant signal evaluations for the EMC test equipment If QPEak is selected the video filter is automatically switched off In addition the couplings between the span...

Page 607: ... be selected three detectors can be switched on simultaneously Example DET REC POS AVER QPE Switches on the peak average and quasipeak detectors Characteristics RST value AVER SCPI device specific Mode R SENSe 1 2 DETector 1 3 FMEasurement NEGative POSitive RMS AVERage QPEak CAVerage CRMS This command selects the detector for the final measurement which is performed subsequent to the overview meas...

Page 608: ...e channel power in the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement The numeric suffix at SENSe 1 2 is irrelevant Example ESP FILT RRC ON RRC filter switched on Characteristics RST value ON SCPI device specific Mode A SENSe 1 2 ESPectrum FILTer RRC ALPHa 0 1 This command sets the alpha value of the RRC filter for measuring the channel power in the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement if the RRC filter is swit...

Page 609: ...ESP PRES REST Restores the originally provided XML files Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode A SENSe 1 2 ESPectrum RANGe 1 20 BANDwidth RESolution numeric_value This command selects the resolution bandwidth RBW of a range in the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement The numeric suffixes 1 20 specify the range The numeric suffix at SENSe 1 2 is irrelevant Example ESP RANG2 BAND 10E3 se...

Page 610: ...G2 DEL deletes range 2 Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode A SENSe 1 2 ESPectrum RANGe 1 20 FILTer TYPE NORMal CFILter RRC P5 P5Digital PULSe This command sets the filter in the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement For details on filter type refer to Filter Types on page 4 117 The numeric suffixes 1 20 specify the range The numeric suffix at SENSe 1 2 is irrelevant Example ESP RANG2 ...

Page 611: ...irrelevant Example ESP RANG2 INP ATT 30db RF attenuation of range 2 to 30 dB Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode A SENSe 1 2 ESPectrum RANGe 1 20 INPut ATTenuation AUTO ON OFF This command switches the attenuation mode of a range in the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement to AUTO ON or MANUAL OFF The numeric suffixes 1 20 specify the range The numeric suffix at SENSe 1 2 is irreleva...

Page 612: ...e 1 2 is irrelevant Parameter 400 to 400 dBm Example ESP RANG5 LIM ABS STAR 40 Absolute limit at start frequency in range 5 is 40 dBm Characteristics RST value 13dBm SCPI device specific Mode A SENSe 1 2 ESPectrum RANGe 1 20 LIMit ABSolute STOP numeric_value This command defines the absolute limit at the stop frequency of the range for the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement The numeric suffixes 1 ...

Page 613: ...nt ABSolute Checks only the absolute limits defined RELative Checks only the relative limits Relative limits are defined as relative to the measured power in the reference range AND Combines the absolute and relative limit The limit check fails when both limits are violated OR Combines the absolute and relative limit The limit check fails when one of the limits is violated The numeric suffixes at ...

Page 614: ...ment range The numeric suffixes 1 20 specify the range The numeric suffix at SENSe 1 2 is irrelevant Example ESP RANG2 SWE TIME AUTO ON activates the coupling of frequency range and bandwidths in range 2 Characteristics RST value ON SCPI device specific Mode A SENSe 1 2 ESPectrum RANGe 1 20 TRANsducer string This command sets the transducer factor for a range in the Spectrum Emission Mask measurem...

Page 615: ...r measurement in the reference range The numeric suffixes 1 20 specify the range The numeric suffix at SENSe 1 2 is irrelevant Parameter PEAK Measures the highest peak within the reference range CPOWer Measures the channel power within the reference range integral bandwidth method Example ESP RTYP PEAK selects highest peak Characteristics RST value CPOW SCPI device specific Mode A ...

Page 616: ..._value This command switches on automatic detection of narrowband and broadband interference signals The detector for the final measurement is also automatically selected Example FME NBBB ON Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific Mode R SENSe 1 2 FMEasurement NBBB LEVel numeric_value This command enters the decision threshold to discriminate between broadband and narrowband interferenc...

Page 617: ...nded FLOating This command selects the ground settings on the V network on which level measurements are consecutively performed in the final measurement This command is available only for certain V networks FMEasurement LISN FOURphase TWOPhase ESH3Z5 ESH2Z5 Example FME LISN PEAR GRO FLO Characteristics RST value GRO SCPI device specific Mode R SENSe 1 2 FMEasurement LISN FILTer HPAS STATe ON OFF T...

Page 618: ...f Commands SENSe Subsystem SENSe 1 2 FMEasurement TIME numeric_value This command defines the measurement time in which the values indicated in the peak list final measurement values are re checked Example FME TIME 0 01 Characteristics RST value 1 s SCPI device specific Mode R ...

Page 619: ... defines the step width of the center frequency Example FREQ CENT STEP 120MHz Characteristics RST value AUTO 0 1 SPAN is switched on SCPI conform Mode R A SENSe 1 2 FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK SPAN RBW OFF This command couples the step width of the center frequency to span span 0 or to the resolution bandwidth span 0 or cancels the couplings Parameter SPAN Coupling to frequency display range for sp...

Page 620: ...the sweep in analyzer mode Example FREQ STAR 20MHz Characteristics RST value 0 SCPI conform Mode R A F SENSe 1 2 FREQuency STOP 0 to fmax This command defines the stop frequency of the overall scan in receiver mode It defines the stop frequency of the sweep in analyzer mode Example FREQ STOP 20MHz Characteristics RST value fmax SCPI conform Mode R A F SENSe 1 2 FREQuency MODE CW FIXed SWEep SCAN T...

Page 621: ... value TDOMain for the receiver mode and SWEep for the analyzer mode SCPI device specific Mode R A In receiver mode this command is available only with the option ESU K53 SENSe 1 2 FREQuency OFFSet numeric_value This command defines the frequency offset of the instrument Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Characteristics RST value 0 Hz SCPI conform Mode A ...

Page 622: ...ent setup measurement and querying of the results in a single command With this method there is the least delay between the measurement and the result output However it requires the control computer to wait for the response from the instrument 2 Instrument setup and querying of the result list at the end of the measurement With this method the control computer may be used for other activities whil...

Page 623: ...equence When synchronizing the command with OPC a service request is generated as soon as all frequency points are processed and the defined number of individual measurements is reached To reduce the setting time all indicated parameters are set up simultaneously at each test point The query form of the command processes the list and immediately returns the list of results The number of results pe...

Page 624: ...m 10dB OFF NORM 30kHz 100kHz 434us 0 the result list is extended to 3 results per frequency point peak RMS and average 28 3 29 6 1 5 30 6 31 9 0 9 38 1 40 0 2 3 Example filter type NORMal normal resolution filter CFILter channel filter These are especially steep edged filters which are used for example in Fast ACP measurement to ensure the band limiting of a transmission channel in the time domain...

Page 625: ...racteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode A Step Freq MHz Ref Level RF Att el Att Filter type RBW VBW Meas Time TRG Level reserved 1 935 2 20 dBm 10 dB OFF Normal 1 MHz 3 MHz 434 us 0 2 935 4 20 dBm 10 dB OFF Channel 30 kHz 100 kHz 434 us 0 3 935 6 20 dBm 10 dB OFF Channel 30 kHz 100 kHz 434 us 0 The measurement is performed in the time domain and therefore the span is set to 0 Hz If the ti...

Page 626: ... power average detector OFF deactivates the measurement of the average power trigger mode Selection of the trigger source used for the list measurement Possible values IMMediate VIDeo EXTernal IFPower trigger slope Used trigger slope Possible values POSitive NEGative trigger offset Offset between the detection of the trigger signal and the start of the measurement at the next frequency point Range...

Page 627: ... specific Mode A SENSe 1 2 LIST RANGe 1 20 BANDwidth RESolution numeric_value This command selects the resolution bandwidth RBW of a range in the spurious measurement Example LIST RANG2 BAND 10E3 Sets the RBW to 10 KHz Characteristics RST value 10 kHz SCPI device specific Mode A SENSe 1 2 LIST RANGe 1 20 BANDwidth VIDeo numeric_value This command selects the video bandwidth VBW of a range in the s...

Page 628: ...ETector APEak NEGative POSitive SAMPle RMS AVERage This command sets the detector in the spurious measurement Example LIST RANG2 DET APE Autopeak detector Characteristics RST value POS SCPI device specific Mode A SENSe 1 2 LIST RANGe 1 20 FILTer TYPE NORMal CHANnel RRC P5 P5D PULSe This command sets the filter in the spurious measurement For details on filter type refer to chapter 4 section Filter...

Page 629: ...autoranging of a range in the spurious measurement on or off Example LIST RANG2 INP ATT AUTO ON Activates autorange for range 2 Characteristics RST value ON SCPI device specific Mode A SENSe 1 2 LIST RANGe 1 20 INPut GAIN STATe ON OFF This command switches the preamplifier of a range in the spurious measurement on or off Example LIST RANG2 INP GAIN STAT ON Activates the preamplifier for range 2 Ch...

Page 630: ... device specific Mode A SENSe 1 2 LIST RANGe 1 20 POINts numeric_value This command defines the number of sweep points of a range in the spurious measurement Example LIST RANG2 POIN 301 Sets 301 sweep points in range 2 Characteristics RST value 625 SCPI device specific Mode A SENSe 1 2 LIST RANGe 1 20 RLEVel numeric_value This command defines the reference level of a range in the spurious measurem...

Page 631: ...th settings in a spurious measurement range Example LIST RANG2 SWE TIME AUTO ON Activates the coupling of frequency range and bandwidths in range 2 Characteristics RST value ON SCPI device specific Mode A SENSe 1 2 LIST RANGe 1 20 TRANsducer string This command sets the transducer factor for a range in the spurious measurement Example LIST RANG2 TRAN fac_1 Sets the transducer factor fac_1 in range...

Page 632: ... case of a video signal or an IF signal the threshold can be set separately If an external trigger signal is used the threshold is adjusted to those of the normal trigger settings TRIG key while with a video signal the threshold can be set as desired The following graphics shows the relation between trigger time trigger offset for delayed gate opening and measurement time Depending on the settings...

Page 633: ...query makes the instrument settings performs the defined number of measurements and outputs the measurement results list Parameter analyzer freq Receive frequency for the burst signals to be measured center frequency in manual operation The range is 0 Hz to max frequency depending on instrument model rbw Resolution bandwidth for the measurement The range is from 10 Hz to 10 MHz in steps of 1 2 3 5...

Page 634: ...or the return values is always dBm The command SENSe MPOWer 935 2MHz 1MHz 434us VIDEO 50PCT 5us MEAN 20 may for instance cause the following list to be returned 18 3 18 6 18 1 18 0 17 9 18 3 18 6 18 1 18 0 17 9 18 3 18 6 18 1 18 0 17 9 18 3 18 6 18 1 18 0 17 9 Example SENSe MPOWer 935 2MHz 1MHz 434us VIDEO 50PCT 5us MEAN 20 performs a measurement sequence with the following settings Frequency 935 ...

Page 635: ...onse to service request SENSe MPOWer RESult Characteristics RST value SCPI instrument specific Mode A F A T The measurement function always uses trace 1 in the selected screen and acti vates the selected screen Repeated use of the command without changes to its parameters i e using the same settings again will speed up the measurement since the previous hardware settings will be cached and therefo...

Page 636: ...n values is always dBm If no measurement result is available the command will return a query error Example ESE 1 SRE 32 Configuration of status reporting systems for the generation of an SRQ on operation complete SENSe MPOWer 935 2MHz 1MHz 434us VIDEO 50PCT 5us MEAN 20 OPC Configuring and starting the measurement Further actions of the control computer during measurement On SRQ Response to service...

Page 637: ...acteristics RST value 20 kHz SCPI device specific Mode A F SENSe 1 2 POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel 100 Hz to 2000 MHz This command defines the channel spacing of the adjacent channel to the TX channel At the same time the spacing of alternate adjacent channels 1 to 11 is set to the double or triple etc of the entered value The command is only available in the frequency domain span 0 Example POW ...

Page 638: ... and lower channel in pairs The figure 0 stands for pure channel power measurement The command is only available in the frequency domain span 0 Example POW ACH ACP 3 Sets the number of adjacent channels to 3 i e the adjacent channel and alternate adjacent channels 1 and 2 are switched on Characteristics RST value 1 SCPI device specific Mode A F SENSe 1 2 POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel 100...

Page 639: ...of the alternate adjacent channels of the radio transmission system If the channel bandwidth of an alternate adjacent channel e g channel no 1 is changed the bandwidth of all the following alternate adjacent channels e g channels no 2 to 11 is automatically set to the same value With SENS POW HSP OFF the analog and FIR filters are available in the range from 10 Hz to 10 MHz With SENS POW HSP ON th...

Page 640: ...LPH ACH 0 26 sets Alpha to 0 26 Characteristics RST value 0 22 SCPI device specific Mode A SENSe 1 2 POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALTernate 1 11 0 1 This command sets the rolloff factor of the RRC weighting filter for the alternate channels It is only available if Fast ACP is not active and no predefine standard is selected This command changes the setting for the adjacent channel as well The numer...

Page 641: ... FILT STAT ACH ON activates the weighting filter Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific Mode A SENSe 1 2 POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate 1 to 11 ON OFF This command switches the weigthing filter state for the alternate channel on or off It is only available if Fast ACP is not active and no predefine standard is selected This command changes the setting for all alternate channels ...

Page 642: ...no RST value and no query SENSe 1 2 POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO MINimum MAXimum LHIGhest OFF This command activates or deactivates the automatic selection of a transmission channel to be used as a reference channel in relative adjacent channel power measurements The transmission channel with the highest power the transmission channel with the lowest power or the transmission channel ne...

Page 643: ... performed after the adjustment Synchronization is possible only in the single sweep mode The result is queried with the command CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult The command is available only for measurements in the frequency domain span 0 Example POW ACH PRES ACP Sets the frequency span the measurement bandwidths and the detector as required for the ACP measurement in screen A INIT CONT OFF...

Page 644: ...er HSPeed ON OFF This command switches on or off the high speed channel adjacent channel power measurement The measurement itself is performed in the time domain on the center frequencies of the individual channels The command automatically switches to the time domain and back Depending on the selected mobile radio standard weighting filters with cos characteristic or very steep sided channel filt...

Page 645: ... by repeating the reference measurement in the new instrument setting Example POW NCOR ON Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific Mode A SENSe 1 2 POWer TRACe 1 to 3 This command assigns the channel adjacent channel power measurement to the indicated trace in the selected measurement window The corresponding trace must be active i e its state must be different from blank Example POW TRA...

Page 646: ...l of the instrument The reference settings are not changed after a preset Example ROSC SOUR EXT Characteristics RST value SCPI conform Mode R A RST is not influencing this parameter SENSe 1 2 ROSCillator SOURce EAUTo This command queries the current source of the reference signal if the external reference source EXT INT is used The command returns INT if the internal reference source is used and E...

Page 647: ...nce settings are not changed if a preset occurs to maintain the specific setup of a test system The factory default is NORMal This function requires a synthesizer board revision with hardware code 7 or above You can check this information in the HWC column of the hardware info window see HARDWARE INFO on page 4 291 Example ROSC EXT PLL NORM Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode A Mod...

Page 648: ...SENSe 1 2 ROSCillator INTernal TUNE SAVE This command saves the new value for the tuning of the internal reference oscillator The factory set value in the EEPROM is overwritten This command is only available at service level 1 Example ROSC TUN SAV Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A ...

Page 649: ... to fmax This command defines the stop frequency of the selected receiver scan range Example SCAN1 STOP 200kHz Sets the stop frequency of scan range 1 to 200 kHz Characteristics RST value 30 MHz range1 1 GHz range2 SCPI device specific Mode R SENSe 1 2 SCAN 1 to 10 STEP fmin to fmax This command defines the step size for the frequency of the selected receiver scan range Example SCAN1 STEP 100Hz Se...

Page 650: ...ax This command defines the RF attenuation for the selected receiver scan range Example SCAN1 INP ATT 30dB Sets the input attenuation of scan range 1 to 30 dB Characteristics RST value 10 dB SCPI device specific Mode R SENSe 1 2 SCAN 1 to 10 INPut ATTenuation AUTO ON OFF This command switches on or off the autoranging function in the selected receiver scan range Example SCAN1 INP ATT AUTO ON Activ...

Page 651: ...subscan Only with option R S ESU B24 Example SCAN1 INP GAIN LNA ON Switches the low noise amplifier on for scan range 1 Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific Mode R SENSe 1 2 SCAN 1 to 10 INPut TYPE INPUT1 INPUT2 This command defines the input for a receiver subscan Example SCAN1 INP TYPE INPUT2 Activates RF input 2 for scan range 1 Characteristics RST value INPUT 1 SCPI device specif...

Page 652: ...the time domain 1 µs to 16000 s with span 0 If SWEep TIME is directly programmed automatic coupling to resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth is switched off Example SWE TIME 10s Characteristics RST value analyzer AUTO is set to ON 100 ms receiver SCPI conform Mode R A SENSe 1 2 SWEep TIME AUTO ON OFF This command controls the automatic coupling of the sweep time to the frequency span and bandwi...

Page 653: ...gate signal If the external gate is selected the trigger source is automatically switched to EXTernal as well In case of measurement with external gate the measured values are recorded as long as the gate is opened There are two possibilities The gate is edge triggered SWEep EGATe TYPE EDGE After detection of the set gate signal edge the gate remains open until the gate delay SWEep EGATe HOLDoff h...

Page 654: ...ime cannot be defined with the parameter EGATe LENGth in case of level triggering The gate is closed when the gate signal disappears Example SWE EGAT TYPE EDGE Characteristics RST value EDGE SCPI device specific Mode A SENSe 1 2 SWEep EGATe POLarity POSitive NEGative This command determines the polarity of the external gate signal The setting is valid both for the edge of an edge triggered signal ...

Page 655: ...signal at 20 dBm is detected within the IF path bandwidth Example SWE EGAT SOUR IFP Switches the gate source to IF power Characteristics RST value IFPower SCPI device specific Mode A SENSe 1 2 SWEep EGATe TRACe 1 3 COMMent To enter a comment string in the gate range table The suffix after TRACe indicates the trace Example SWE EGAT TRAC2 COMMent To enter a comment in trace 2 Characteristics RST val...

Page 656: ...es 1st IF shifting For further details refer to IF SHIFT on page 4 298 IF SHIFT AUTO automatically selects the suitable 1st IF shifting The Signal Frequency has to specified for that purpose in the Signal Frequency dialog Input signals at a frequency of half the 1st IF in the frequency range of 2270 MHz to 2350 MHz will reduce the dynamic range of the analyzer This problem only occurs for low RF a...

Page 657: ...HIF FREQ 2GHz carrier signal at 2 GHz Characteristics RST value 1 GHz SCPI device specific Mode A SENSe 1 2 SWEep MODE AUTO LIST ESPectrum This command controls the sweep continuation Example SWE MODE LIST Activates the spurious emissions measurement Characteristics RST value AUTO SCPI device specific Mode A SENSe 1 2 SWEep POINts 155 313 625 1251 1999 2501 5001 10001 20001 30001 This command defi...

Page 658: ...ommand toggles between linear logarithmic sand automatic linear tep modes In receiver mode this setting does not influence the display of the frequency axis In analyzer mode this command toggles between linear and logarithmic sweep The frequency axis is set to linear or logarithmic scaling accordingly Example SWE SPAC LOG Characteristics RST value LIN SCPI conform Mode R A ...

Page 659: ... generator for screen A Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI conform Mode R A SOURce 1 2 DM STATe ON OFF This command switches on or off the external I Q modulation of the tracking generator in the selected measurement window External AM and external FM are switched off if active This command is only valid in conjunction with the tracking generator option B9 Example SOUR2 DM STAT ON Switches on the ...

Page 660: ...ng DUTs can be measured with this setting The possible value range is 150 MHz to 150 MHz It should be noted that the terms start frequency tracking frequency offset and stop frequency tracking frequency offset are both 1 kHz or both 1 kHz External I Q modulation is switched off if active This command is only valid in conjunction with the tracking generator option B9 Example SOUR FREQ OFFS 10MHz Sw...

Page 661: ...ernal tracking generator is changed linear from start power to stop power The start and stop power values are shown on the right side below the diagram Example SOUR POW MODE SWE switches on the level sweep in screen A Characteristics RST value FIX SCPI conform Mode A SOURce 1 2 POWer STARt 30 dBm to 5 dBm This command defines the start power of the power sweep The start value can be smaller than t...

Page 662: ... the generator address to 28 SOUR EXT1 FREQ SWE ON Activates the frequency sweep for generator 1 SOUR EXT ON Activates the external generator Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific Mode R A SOURce 1 2 EXTernal 1 2 FREQuency FACTor DENominator numeric_value This command defines the denominator of the factor with which the analyzer frequency is multiplied in order to obtain the transmit ...

Page 663: ...al 1 2 FREQuency OFFSet numeric_value This command defines the frequency offset of the selected generator 1 or 2 with reference to the receive frequency in the selected window Example SOUR EXT FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Sets a frequency offset of the generator transmit frequency compared to the analyzer receive frequency of 1 GHz Characteristics RST value 0 Hz SCPI device specific Select the multiplication fa...

Page 664: ... the selected generator 1 or 2 in the selected window This command is only valid in combination with option Ext Generator Control R S FSP B10 Example SOUR EXT POW 30dBm Sets the generator level to 30 dBm Characteristics RST value 20 dBm SCPI device specific Mode R A SOURce 1 2 EXTernal 1 2 ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal This command switches between external and internal reference oscillator...

Page 665: ...NDition section of the STATus OPERation register Readout does not delete the contents of the CONDition section The value returned reflects the current hardware status Example STAT OPER COND Characteristics RST value SCPI conform Mode R A STATus OPERation ENABle 0 to 65535 This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus OPERation register The ENABle register selectively enables the i...

Page 666: ... i e all events in these registers are not passed on Example STAT PRES Characteristics RST value SCPI conform Mode R A STATus QUEStionable EVENt This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus QUEStionable register The contents of the EVENt section are deleted after the readout Example STAT QUES Characteristics RST value SCPI conform Mode R A STATus QUEStionable CONDition This...

Page 667: ...ionable POWer EVENt This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus QUEStionable POWer register Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section Example STAT QUES POW Characteristics RST value SCPI conform Mode R A STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDition This command queries the contents of the CONDition section of the STATus QUEStionable POWer register Readout does not delete th...

Page 668: ... LIMit 1 2 EVENt This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus QUEStionable LIMit register Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section Example STAT QUES LIM Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A STATus QUEStionable LIMit 1 2 CONDition This command queries the contents of the CONDition section of the STATus QUEStionable LIMit register Readout does not ...

Page 669: ...nable LMARgin 1 2 EVENt This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus QUEStionable LMARgin register Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section Example STAT QUES LMAR Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A STATus QUEStionable LMARgin 1 2 CONDition This command queries the contents of the CONDition section of the STATus QUEStionable LMARgin register Rea...

Page 670: ... QUEStionable ACPLimit EVENt This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit register Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section Example STAT QUES ACPL Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit CONDition This command queries the contents of the CONDition section of the STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit register...

Page 671: ...tionable FREQuency EVENt This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus QUEStionable FREQuency register Example STAT QUES FREQ Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDition This command queries the contents of the CONDition section of the STATus QUEStionable FREQuency register ...

Page 672: ... TRANsducer EVENt This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus QUEStionable TRANsducer register Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section Example STAT QUES TRAN Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A STATus QUEStionable TRANsducer CONDition This command queries the contents of the CONDition section of the STATus QUEStionable FREQuency register Reado...

Page 673: ...s command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus QUEStionable TRANsducer register from 1 to 0 for the transitions of the CONDition bit Example STAT QUES TRAN NTR 65535 Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A STATus QUEue NEXT This command returns the earliest entry to the error queue and deletes it Positive error numbers indicate device specific errors negative error num...

Page 674: ...might be included in the binary data block and therefore should not be interpreted as a terminator in this particular case This can be avoided by changing the receive terminator to EOI Output of binary data from the instrument to the control computer does not require such a terminator change Example SYST COMM GPIB RTER EOI Characteristics RST value no influence on this parameter factory default LF...

Page 675: ...1 or 2 The following types are available GPIB alone GPIB for all the generators of other manufacturers and some Rohde Schwarz units GPIB and TTL interface for synchronization TTL for most of the Rohde Schwarz generators see table in command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TYPE The difference between the two operating modes is the execution speed While during GPIB operation each settable frequ...

Page 676: ...The two commands are equivalent Example SYST COMM SER CONT DTR OFF SYST COMM SER CONT RTS IBF Characteristics RST value no influence on this parameter factory default OFF SCPI conform Mode R A SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RECeive BAUD 110 300 600 1200 2400 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 128000 This command sets the transmission speed for the serial interface COM Example SYST COMM SER BAUD 2400 Charact...

Page 677: ... SER PACE XON Characteristics RST value no influence on this parameter factory default NONE SCPI conform Mode R A SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt This command queries the name of the first printer in the list of printers available under Windows NT The names of other installed printers can be queried with command SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate NEXT If no printer is configured an em...

Page 678: ...nth day Example SYST DATE 2000 6 1 Characteristics RST value SCPI conform Mode R A SYSTem DISPlay FPANel ON OFF This command activates or deactivates the display of the front panel keys on the screen With the display activated the instrument can be operated on the screen using the mouse by pressing the corresponding buttons This may be useful if the instrument is operated in a detached station by ...

Page 679: ...or messages defined by SCPI cf chapter Error Messages If the error queue is empty the error number 0 no error is returned This command is identical with the command STATus QUEue NEXT This command is a query and therefore has no RST value Example SYST ERR Characteristics RST value SCPI conform Mode R A SYSTem ERRor LIST This command reads all system messages and returns a list of comma separated st...

Page 680: ...has to look like Extract the ZIP file containg the files needed for an update including the folder structure Create the required sub folders on the instrument and copy all the files from all sub folders onto the instrument Now start the remote update Note that in some environments instead of the character a special escape character may be required e g for C C programming language Example SYST FIRM...

Page 681: ...xample SYST LANG 8566B Switches the HP emulation on SYST HPC HP Uses HP coupling ratios Characteristics RST value FSP SCPI device specific Mode A SYSTem IDENtify FACTory This command resets the IDN string to the factory default Return value 1 for the factory default state 0 for a changed IDN string Example SYST IDEN FACT Sets the ID string to the factory default Characteristics RST value SCPI devi...

Page 682: ...mple SYST LANG SCPI Characteristics RST value SCPI SCPI conform Mode R A There is no query for this command When SCPI is selected the 8566B 8568B 8594E command set is available in addition When 8566A 8566B 8568A or 8568B is selected both command sets A and B are available as far as they are supported The HP model 8591E is compatible to HP model 8594E the HP models 71100C 71200C and 71209A are comp...

Page 683: ...cteristics RST value SCPI conform Mode R A SYSTem PRESet COMPatible FSP OFF This command specifies the preset compatibility Parameter OFF Mixed mode is set as preset mode FSP Analyzer mode is set as preset mode Example SYST PRES COMP FSP Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific Mode R A SYSTem SHUTdown This command shuts down the instrument This command is an event and therefore has no q...

Page 684: ...nt for the instrument Example SYST VERS Characteristics RST value SCPI conform Mode R A This command is a query and therefore has no RST value SYSTem MSIZe MBOard This command outputs the memory size of the mainboard Parameter Example SYST MSIZ MBO Outputs the memory size of the mainboard Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode R A SYSTem RSWeep ON OFF This command controls a repeated ...

Page 685: ...wing format No Start Stop rbw freq Levelabs Levelrel Delta Limitcheck unused1 unused2 Where If the FM demodulator option R S FS K7 is active only the displayed trace data is read out and recalled A portion of the measurement data that can be called by means of a marker however is calculated from the raw measurement data These results are no longer available after recalling a trace the associated q...

Page 686: ...lues are transmitted Return value The returned values are scaled in the current level unit Returned FM modulated measurement values activated option R S FS K7 are scaled in Hz Example TRAC TRACE1 A A data list in the current format TRAC TRACE1 Characteristics RST value SCPI conforming Mode all Return value The returned values are scaled in the current level unit Returned FM modulated measurement v...

Page 687: ...ransferred In ASCII format these data are values separated by commas If the transfer takes place using the format real REAL 32 the data are transferred in block format The parameter of the query is the trace name TRACE1 to FINAL3 it indicates which trace memory will be read out 6 20 2 Number and Format of the Measurement Values for the Different Operating Modes The number of measurement values dep...

Page 688: ... trace1 active 0 1 4 byte trace2 active 0 1 4 byte trace3 active 0 1 n 4 bytes measurement results of trace 1 if trace 1 is active n 4 bytes measurement results of trace 2 if trace 2 is active n 4 bytes measurement results of trace 3 if trace 3 is active n 1 byte status information per measurement result bit 2 overrange trace1 to trace 3 STATus is only possible in form of a query during scan measu...

Page 689: ...Vel This query returns the current Y results of the sweep During a sweep the last measured value is read out Example INIT CONT OFF switches to single sweep mode INIT starts a sweep without waiting for the sweep end TRAC1 IMM LEV queries the level of the last measured measurement point Characteristics RST value SCPI conform Mode A TRACe 1 2 IMMediate RESult This query returns the current X and Y re...

Page 690: ...o 50 MHz The A D converter samples the IF signal 20 4 MHz at a rate of 81 6 MHz The digital signal is down converted to the complex baseband lowpass filtered and the sampling rate is reduced i e the output sampling rate is set between 10 0 kHz and 81 6 MHz in steps of 0 1 Hz This avoids unnecessary oversampling at narrower bandwidths which saves processing time and increases the maximum recording ...

Page 691: ...ment and output of the result data but it requires the control computer to wait actively for the response data Setting up the instrument start of the measurement via INIT and query of the result list at the end of the measurement With this method the control computer can be used for other activities during the measurement In this case the additional time needed for synchronization via service requ...

Page 692: ... 32 In this case the command returns binary data Definite Length Block Data according to IEEE 488 2 with the lists of I and Q data being arranged one after the other in 32 Bit IEEE 754 floating point data The scheme of the response string is as follows 44096 I value1 I value2 I value512 Q value1 Q value2 Q value512 with 4 digits of the subsequent number of data bytes 4 in the example 4096 number o...

Page 693: ...ples of Q data of Block 3 Fig 6 46 Block transfer structure Characteristics RST value SCPI device specific Mode A T TRACe 1 2 IQ DATA FORMat COMPatible IQBLock IQPair This command sets the data output formatting using the TRAC IQ DATA command For further details see Fig 6 46 Parameter COMPatible 512k I data and 512k Q data is alternately transferred IQBLock First all I and then all Q data is trans...

Page 694: ... data sampling TRAC IQ SET NORM 10MHz 32MHz EXT POS 100 4096 configures the measurement Filter type Normal RBW 10 MHz Sample Rate 32 MHz Trigger Source External Trigger Slope Positive Pretrigger Samples 100 of Samples 4096 INIT WAI starts the measurement and waits for its end FORMat REAL 32 specifies the format of the response data Reading the results TRAC IQ DATA MEM 0 2048 reads in 2048 I Q valu...

Page 695: ... the A D converter Value range 300 kHz 10 MHz in steps of 1 2 3 5 and 20 MHz and 50 MHz for filter type NORMal sample rate Sampling rate for the data acquisition Value range 10 kHz to 81 6 MHz for filter type NORMal trigger mode Selection of the trigger source used for the measurement Values IMMediate EXTernal IFPower trigger slope Used trigger slope Values POSitive NEGative pretrigger samples Num...

Page 696: ... 128 SCPI device specific Mode A T TRACe 1 2 IQ SRATe 10 0 kHz to 81 6 MHz This command sets the sampling rate for the I Q data acquisition Thus the sample rate can be modified without affecting the other settings Return value 10 0 kHz to 81 6 MHz Example TRAC IQ SRAT 4MHZ Characteristics RST value 32 MHz SCPI device specific Mode A T For using these default settings with command TRAC IQ DATA the ...

Page 697: ... of either 10 2 MHz to 20 4 MHz or 20 4 MHz to 40 8 MHz Example TRAC IQ FILT FLAT WIDE Characteristics RST value NORM SCPI device specific Mode A The I Q data acquisition is not compatible with other measurement functions Therefore all other measurement functions will be switched off as soon as the I Q measurement function is switched on Additionally a trace display is not possible in this operati...

Page 698: ...aximum number of measurement points which are transferred in one block after the query command TRACe SCAN The total amount of bytes which is transferred depends on the number of active traces Example TRAC POIN LIM 8000 A maximum of 8000 measurement values per trace will be transferred with a single query Characteristics RST value 1000 SCPI device specific Mode R ...

Page 699: ...his command sets the level of the external trigger source Example TRIG LEV 2V Characteristics RST value 1 4 V SCPI device specific Mode A TRIGger 1 2 SEQuence LEVel IFPower 70 to 30 dBm This command sets the level of the IF power trigger source Example TRIG LEV IFP 20DBM Characteristics RST value 20 dBm SCPI device specific Mode R A The trigger source selection has to be done with the command TRIG...

Page 700: ... HOLDoff ADJust AUTO ON OFF This command defines whether the group delay of the bandwidth filters for the external or IF power trigger is compensated ON or not OFF If a burst signal is analyzed in the time domain mode the rising edge will remain at the same time position if compensation is on and the bandwidth changes Example TRIG HOLD ADJ AUTO ON Characteristics RST value OFF SCPI device specific...

Page 701: ... DBM V A W DB PCT UNITLESS DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere DBPT DBUV_MHZ DBMV_MHZ DBUA_MHZ DBUV_M DBUA_M DBUV_MMHZ DBUA_MMHZ This command selects the unit for power for the selected measurement window DBxx_MHZ indicates the units dBxx MHz and DBxx_MMHZ indicates the units dBxx mMHz the measured level is referenced to a 1 MHz bandwidth Example UNIT POW DBM Sets the power unit for screen A to d...

Page 702: ... the GPIB using the SYSTem LANGuage command To make it possible to also emulate device models that are not part of the selection list of the GPIB LAN GUAGE softkey the identification string received in response to the ID command can be modified key sequence SETUP GENERAL SETUP GPIB ID STRING USER This allows any device model to be emulated whose command set is compatible with one of the supported ...

Page 703: ...NNOT ANNOT ON OFF ANNOT 1 0 ANNOT Annotation HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available APB APB Trace A B Trace A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available in V3 3x and above AT AT numeric_value DB DM AT DN AT UP AT AUTO AT Attenuation HP 8566A HP 8568A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available AUNITS AUNITS DBM DBMV DBUV AUNITS Amplitude Units HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E availa...

Page 704: ...1 C1 A B off HP 8566A HP 8568A available C2 C2 A B A HP 8566A HP 8568A available CA CA Couple Attenuation HP 8566A HP 8568A available CAL 1 CAL ALL CAL ON CAL OFF Start analyzer self alignment HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available CF CF numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ CF UP CF DN CF Center Frequency HP 8566A HP 8568A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available CHANPWR CHANPWR TRA TRB numeri...

Page 705: ... HP 8568A available in V3 3x and above DA 2 DA Display address available in V3 7x and above DEMOD 1 DEMOD ON OFF AM FM AF Demodulator HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available DEMODAGC 2 DEMODAGC ON OFF 1 0 DEMODAGC Demodulation AGC HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available in V3 2x and above DEMODT DEMODT numeric_value S MS US SC DEMODT UP DN DEMODT Demodulation time HP 856xE HP 8566B HP ...

Page 706: ...imit line HP 856xE available in V4 3x and above ERR ERR 250 cal level error ERR 300 LO unlock ERR 472 cal error digital filter ERR 473 cal error analog filter ERR 552 cal error log amp ERR 902 unscale tracking generator ERR 906 oven cold ERR117 numeric unit error ERR112 Unrecognized Command Now some FSx errors are mapped to HP errors HP8568A HP856xE Available in V3 7x and above ERR ERR Error queue...

Page 707: ...x and above GATE 1 GATE ON OFF GATE 1 0 HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available GATECTL 1 GATECTL EDGE LEVEL GATECTL HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available GD 1 GD numeric_value US MS SC GD DN GD UP GD HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available GL 1 GL numeric_value US MS SC GL DN GL UP GL HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available GP 1 GP POS NEG GP HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B H...

Page 708: ...ve KS KS Unlock register HP 8566A HP 8568A available in V3 4x and above KS91 KS91 Read Amplitude Error HP 8566A HP 8568A available in V3 4x and above KSA KSA Amplitude Units in dBm HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSB KSB Amplitude Units in dBmV HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSC KSC Amplitude Units in dBuV HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSD KSD Amplitude Units in V HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSE KSE numeri...

Page 709: ...KSa Normal Detection HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSb KSb Pos Peak Detection HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSd KSd Neg Peak Detection HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSe KSe Sample Detection HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSg CRT beam off KSh CRT beam on KSj KSj View Trace C HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSk KSk Blank Trace C HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSl KSl Transfer B to C HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSm ...

Page 710: ...imit line HP 856xE available in V4 3x and above LIMIREL relative limit line HP 856xE available in V4 3x and above LIMISAV save limit line HP 856xE available in V4 3x and above LIMITEST limit line test HP 856xE available in V4 3x and above LIML lower limit line value HP 856xE available in V4 3x and above LIMM middle limit line value HP 856xE available in V4 3x and above LIMTFL flat limit line segme...

Page 711: ...unt on HP 8566A HP 8568A available MDS MDS Measurement data size HP 8566B available in V3 7x and above MEAS Measurement status HP 856xE available in V4 3x and above MF MF MF Marker Frequency HP 8566A HP 8568A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MINH1 MINH TRC Minimum Hold HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKA MKA numeric_value MKA Marker Amplitude HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B H...

Page 712: ...n hidden MKFC MKFC ON OFF Frequency Counter on off HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available in V3 2x and above MKFCR 1 MKFCR numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ MKFCR DN MKFCR UP MKFCR Frequency Counter Resolution HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKMIN MKMIN Marker Min HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKN MKN MKN numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ MKN DN MKN UP MKN ON MKN OFF MKN...

Page 713: ... and above MKSS MKSS CF Stepsize Marker Freq HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKT MKT numeric_value S MS US SC MKT MKF fstart MKT SWT Span HP 856xE HP 8594E available in V3 3x and above MKTRACE MKTRACE TRA TRB TRC Marker to Trace HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKTRACK MKTRACK ON OFF MKTRACK 1 0 MKTRACK Signal Track HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKTYPE MK...

Page 714: ...66A HP 8568A available O2 O2 Format Binary Values 0 to 4095 HP 8566A HP 8568A available in V3 3x and above O3 O3 Format ASCII HP 8566A HP 8568A available OA OA Output All HP 8566A HP 8568A available OL OL 80 characters OL Output Learn String HP 8566A HP 8568A available OT OT Output Trace Annotations HP 8566A HP 8568A available PA 2 PA numeric_value numeric_value Plot command HP 8566A HP 8568A avai...

Page 715: ...et Status Bit Enable HP 8566A HP 8568A available R3 R3 Set Status Bit Enable HP 8566A HP 8568A available R4 R4 Set Status Bit Enable HP 8566A HP 8568A available RB RB numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ RB DN RB UP RB AUTO RB Resolution Bandwidth HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available RBR RBR numeric_value RBR DN RBR UP RBR Resolution Bandwidth Ratio HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available i...

Page 716: ...Level Offset HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available RQS RQS Service Request Bit mask HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available S1 S1 Continuous Sweep HP 8566A HP 8568A available S2 S2 Single Sweep HP 8566A HP 8568A available SADD add a limit line segment HP 856xE available in V4 3x and above SAVES SAVES numeric_value Save State Register HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available SAVE...

Page 717: ...S Source Power Offset HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available SRCPWR 1 SRCPWR numeric_value DB DM SRCPWR DN SRCPWR UP SRCPWR ON SRCPWR OFF SRCPWR Source Power HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available SS SS numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ SS DN SS UP SS AUTO SS CF Step Size HP 8566A HP 8568A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available ST ST numeric_value US MS SC ST DN ST UP ST AUTO ST Sw...

Page 718: ...4E available in V3 2x and above T0 T0 Threshold off HP 8566A HP 8568A available T1 T1 Free Run Trigger HP 8566A HP 8568A available T2 2 T2 Line Trigger HP 8566A HP 8568A available T3 T3 External Trigger HP 8566A HP 8568A available T4 T4 Video Trigger HP 8566A HP 8568A available TA TA Transfer A HP 8566A HP 8568A available TACL TACL Returns instantaneous measurement results See TRACe trace IMMediat...

Page 719: ... Mode HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available TM LINE 2 TM LINE Trigger Line HP 8566B available in V3 7x and above TRA TRA B TRA A TRA I Transfer A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available TRB TRB B TRB A TRB I Transfer B HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available TRSTAT TRSTAT Trace State Query HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available in V3 3x and above TS TS Take Sweep HP 856x...

Page 720: ...pported Commands value integer or floating point numerical value units code DM DM DB HZ KZ MZ GZ MV UV SC MS US delimiter CR LF ETX SPC 3210 ETX 310 Command sections given in are optional The R S ESU GPIB hardware differs from that used in the HP analyzers Therefore the following con straint exists LF EOI are still used as delimiters since the GPIB hardware is able to identify them The other delim...

Page 721: ...and above Command Supported subset Function Corresponding HP Models Status SP_TOI Executes TOI measurement HP 856xE available in V4 1x and above SP_TOIFA Lower primary signal frequency in Hz HP 856xE available in V4 1x and above SP_TOIFB Upper primary signal frequency in Hz HP 856xE available in V4 1x and above SP_TOIFS Primary signal frequency spacing in Hz HP 856xE available in V4 1x and above S...

Page 722: ...and above SP_HPWMIN Minimum resolution bandwidth HP 856xE available in V4 1x and above SP_H_LVL 1 10 Array of amplitudes for each harmonic in dBc relative to the fundamental SP_H_LVL 1 0 the level of the fundamental in dBc The index is the number of the harmonic HP 856xE available in V4 1x and above SP_THD Total harmonic distortion in percent HP 856xE available in V4 1x and above SP_H_NS 1 10 Arra...

Page 723: ...above SP_SR_TH Lower search amplitude limit in dBm or dBc HP 856xE available in V4 1x and above SP_SR_TG Upper search amplitude limit in dBm or dBc HP 856xE available in V4 1x and above SP_SRTFLG Sort flag 0 sort output by frequencies 1 sort output by amplitudes HP 856xE available in V4 1x and above SP_SR_TM Estimated search time in seconds HP 856xE available in V4 1x and above SP_NUMSP Number of ...

Page 724: ...error bit in the status register but always returns a 0 in response FA Default value range step size FB Default value range step size ID Query of instrument type The instrument type entered with SETUP GENERAL SETUP GPIB ID STRING USER will be returned M2 Default value range step size M3 Default value range step size MKACT Only marker 1 is supported as the active marker MKBW Default value MKPT Step...

Page 725: ...fault value range step size STB The status bits are mapped as described with command RQS Bit 2 and 4 are always set in parallel if Command Complete or End of Sweep are recognized The R S ESU cannot distinguish between these conditions Addi tionally these bits are not suitable for synchronization on the end of sweep in con tinuous sweep operation TA Output of 1001 trace points of trace A in O1 or O...

Page 726: ... the original instruments this applies in particular to the number of characters returned Two formats are currently supported when trace data is output Display Units command O1 and physi cal values command O2 O3 or TDF P As to the Display Units format the level data of the R S ESU is converted to match the value range and the resolution of the 8566 8568 series Upon transition to the REMOTE state t...

Page 727: ...601 for 8560E to 8565E 401 for 8594E 6 23 9 Trace Data Input Formats Trace data input is only supported for binary date TDF B TDF A TDF I MDS W MDS B 6 23 10 GPIB Status Reporting The STB command and the serial poll respond with an 8 bit value having the following assignment Bits 0 and 7 are not used and always have the value 0 Please note that the R S ESU reports any key pressed on the front pane...

Page 728: ...FSE alone in column Devices denotes the instrument families FSE FSIQ FSET and ESIB unless otherwise noted in column Notes Devices Command Sheet 1 of 47 Parameter Notes R S ESU FSE CAL R S ESU executes total calibration FSE executes short calibration R S ESU FSE CLS R S ESU FSE ESE R S ESU FSE ESR R S ESU FSE IDN model indicator and version index is different for R S ESU and FSE R S ESU FSE IST R S...

Page 729: ...tion for R S ESU R S ESU CALCulate STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE new function for R S ESU R S ESU CALCulate STATistics X RANGe 10dB to 200dB new function for R S ESU R S ESU CALCulate STATistics X RLEVel 130dBm to 30dBm new function for R S ESU R S ESU CALCulate STATistics Y LOWer 1E 9 to 0 1 new function for R S ESU R S ESU CALCulate STATistics Y UPPer 1E 8 to 1 0 new function for R S ESU FSE CALCul...

Page 730: ... CALCulate 1 2 DELTamarker 1 4 FUNCtion FIXed STATe ON OFF R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 DELTamarker 1 4 FUNCtion PNOise RESult R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 DELTamarker 1 4 FUNCtion PNOise STATe ON OFF FSE CALCulate 1 2 DELTamarker 1 4 MAXimum APEak not available for R S ESU R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 DELTamarker 1 4 MAXimum LEFT R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 DELTamarker 1 4 MAXimum NEXT R S ESU FSE CALCulate...

Page 731: ...Culate 1 2 DLINe 1 2 STATe ON OFF FSE CALCulate 1 2 FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS XTIM DDEM REF XTIM DDEM ERR MPH XTIM DDEM ERR VECT XTIM DDEM SYMB XTIM AM XTIM FM XTIM PM XTIM AMSummary XTIM FMSummary XTIM PMSummary TCAP not available for R S ESU FSET CALCulate 1 2 FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS XTIM DDEM REF XTIM DDEM ERR MPH XTIM DDEM ERR VECT XTIM DDEM SYMB TCAP not available for R S ESU R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 ...

Page 732: ...ACHannel STATe of FSE FSE CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 ACPower ALTernate 1 2 0 to 100 DB 0 to 100 DB compatible to CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 ACPower ALTernate 1 2 RELative of R S ESU not available for FSET R S ESU CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 ACPower ALTernate 1 2 ABSolute 200 to 200 DBM 200 to 200 DBM new function for R S ESU R S ESU CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 ACPower ALTernate 1 2 ABSolute STATe ON OFF new fun...

Page 733: ... 1 2 LIMit 1 8 CONTrol SHIFt numeric_value R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 CONTrol SPACing LINear LOGarithmic FSE CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 CONTrol UNIT TIME S SYM not available for R S ESU R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 CONTrol DATA numeric value numeric value R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 COPY 1 to 8 name R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 DELete R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8...

Page 734: ...IB FSE CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 SPECtrum SWITching not available for R S ESU FSET and ESIB FSE CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 SPURious FAILs TXBand OTXBand RXBand IDLeband not available for R S ESU FSET and ESIB FSE CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 SPURious TXBand OTXBand RXBand IDLeband not available for R S ESU FSET and ESIB R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 STATe ON OFF R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 TRA...

Page 735: ... THReshold numeric value new function for R S ESU R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 UPPer DATA numeric value R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 AOFF R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 COUNt ON OFF R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 COUNt FREQuency R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 COUNt RESolution 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 Hz FSE CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 COUPled STATe ON OFF not available...

Page 736: ...UNCtion DEModulation SELect AM FM R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion DEModulation STATe ON OFF R S ESU CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate numeric value new function for R S ESU R S ESU CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt new function for R S ESU R S ESU CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion FPEaks X new function for R S ESU R S ESU CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtio...

Page 737: ... OBWidth MCACpower MCACpower is not available on the FSE MCACpower ACPower and CPOWer are not available on the FSET R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion POWer SELect ACPower CPOWer OBANdwidth OBWidth CN CN0 MCACpower MCACpower is not available on the FSE MCACpower ACPower and CPOWer are not available on the FSET R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion POWer STATe OFF R S ESU FSE CAL...

Page 738: ...y MEAN AVERage RESult R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN PHOLd RESult R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN RESult R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN STATe ON OFF FSE CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion SUMMary MIDDle AVERage RESult not available for R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion SUMMary MIDDle PHOLd RESult not avai...

Page 739: ...MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation RESult new function for R S ESU R S ESU CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion SUMMarySDEViation AVERage RESult new function for R S ESU R S ESU CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation PHOLd RESult new function for R S ESU R S ESU CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation STATe ON OFF new function for R S ESU R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 MARKe...

Page 740: ...E CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 STEP INCRement numeric_value not available for R S ESU R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 TRACe 1 to 3 R S ESU 3 traces are available per screen FSE 4 traces are available in full screen mode and 2 traces per screen in split screen mode R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 X 0 to MAX frequency sweep time additional unit SYM is available for FSE R S ESU CALCulate 1 2 MA...

Page 741: ...PRession DEFine expr for R S ESU traces can only be subtracted from trace 1 therefore there is no numeric suffix behind MATH and expr may only consist of TRACE1 TRACE2 or TRACE1 TRACE3 FSE CALCulate 1 2 RLINe MIN to MAX not available for R S ESU replaced by CALC MATH POS FSE CALCulate 1 2 RLINe STATe ON OFF not available for R S ESU replaced by CALC MATH POS R S ESU FSE CALCulate 1 2 THReshold MIN...

Page 742: ...late 1 2 X UNIT TIME S SYM not available for R S ESU R S ESU CALibration ABORt new function for R S ESU FSE CALibration BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution not available for R S ESU FSE CALibration IQ not available for R S ESU FSE CALibration LDETector not available for R S ESU FSE CALibration LOSuppression not available for R S ESU FSE CALibration PPEak not available for R S ESU ESIB CALibration PRESelec...

Page 743: ...not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation IMMediate not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching COUNt 1 to 1000 not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching IMMediate not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE CONFigure SPURious ANTenna CONDucted RADiated not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE CONFigure SPURious COUN RXBandt 1 t...

Page 744: ...BTS NETWork PHASe 1 2 PLUS not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE CONFigure BTS NETWork TYPE PGSM PGSM900 EGSM EGSM900 DCS GSM1800 PCS GSM1900 RGSM RGSM900 not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE CONFigure BTS POWer CLASs 1 to 8 1 to 4 M1 M2 M3 not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE CONFigure BTS POWer COUPled ON OFF not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE CONFigure BTS POWer DYNamic 0 to 15 not ava...

Page 745: ... MS NETWork PHASe 1 2 PLUS not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE PGSM PGSM900 EGSM EGSM900 DCS GSM1800 PCS GSM1900 RGSM RGSM900 not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE CONFigure MS POWer CLASs numeric_value not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE CONFigure MS POWer COUPled ON OFF not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE CONFigure MS POWer EXPected numeric_value not available...

Page 746: ...DIAG SERV SFUNction FSET DIAGnostic SERVice HGENerator OFF 10 kHz 100 kHz BALanced not available for R S ESU R S ESU DIAGnostic SERVice HWINfo new function for R S ESU R S ESU FSE DIAGnostic SERVice INPut SELect CALibration RF R S ESU DIAGnostic SERVice INPut PULSed STATe ON OFF new command for R S ESU R S ESU DIAGnostic SERVice INPut PULSed PRATe numeric_value new command for R S ESU R S ESU FSE ...

Page 747: ...SU DISPlay WINDow 1 2 SELect new function for R S ESU R S ESU DISPlay WINDow 1 2 SIZE LARGe SMALl new function for R S ESU R S ESU FSE DISPlay WINDow 1 2 TEXT STATe ON OFF R S ESU FSE DISPlay WINDow 1 2 TEXT DATA string R S ESU FSE DISPlay WINDow 1 2 TIME ON OFF R S ESU FSE DISPlay WINDow 1 2 TRACe 1 3 MODE WRITe VIEW AVERage MAXHold MINHold R S ESU 3 traces are available per screen FSE 4 traces a...

Page 748: ...INear LOGarithmic PERCent PERCent is not available for R S ESU FSE TRACE 1 4 R S ESU FSE DISPlay WINDow 1 2 TRACe 1 3 Y SCALe 10dB to 200dB R S ESU TRACe 1 3 FSE TRACE 1 4 FSET ESIB DISPlay WINDow 1 2 TRACe 1 4 Y SCALe BOTTom numeric_value not available for R S ESU R S ESU FSE DISPlay WINDow 1 2 TRACe 1 3 Y SCALe MODE ABSolute RELative R S ESU TRACe 1 3 FSE TRACE 1 4 FSE DISPlay WINDow 1 2 TRACe 1...

Page 749: ...le for R S ESU and FSET FSE FETCh BURSt PERRor RMS STATus not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE FETCh BURSt POWer IMMediate not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE FETCh MODulation ALL ARFCn TXBand RXBand COMBined DCSRx1800 not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE FETCh PTEMplate REFerence TXBand not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE FETCh SPECtrum MODulation REFerence TXBand not available for R S ...

Page 750: ... CLIP SYST COMM GPIB SER1 SER2 is not available for R S ESU FSIQ ESIB HCOPy DESTination 1 2 MMEM SYST COMM PRIN SYST COMM CLIP R S ESU FSE HCOPy DEVice COLor ON OFF R S ESU HCOPy DEVice LANGuage 1 2 GDI WMF EWMF BMP FSE FSET HCOPy DEVice LANGuage 1 2 HPGL PCL4 PCL5 POSTscript ESCP WMF PCX HP7470 to FSIQ ESIB HCOPy DEVice LANGuage 1 2 WMF GDI EWMF BMP to FSE FSET HCOPy DEVice PRESet 1 2 ON OFF not ...

Page 751: ...E INITiate 1 2 DISPlay ON OFF R S ESU FSE INITiate 1 2 IMMediate FSET INPut PRESelection CATalog not available for R S ESU FSET INPut PRESelection USET NAME name of user defined preselector set to edit existing set or to create new set not available for R S ESU FSET INPut PRESelection USET CLEar not available for R S ESU FSET INPut PRESelection USET COMMent comment for preselector set not availabl...

Page 752: ...new function for R S ESU INPut 1 2 EATT STATe ON OFF new function for R S ESU FSET INPut 1 2 GAIN 0 to 30dB not available for R S ESU FSET ESIB INPut 1 2 GAIN AUTO ON OFF not available for R S ESU R S ESU FSE INPut 1 2 GAIN STATe ON OFF R S ESU FSE INPut 1 2 IMPedance 50 75 FSE INPut 1 2 IMPedance CORRection RAM RAZ not available for R S ESU FSET INPut 1 2 LISN PEARth GROunded FLOating not availab...

Page 753: ... set not available for R S ESU FSET INPut 1 2 PRESelection STATe ON OFF not available for R S ESU FSET INPut 1 2 TYPE RF BALanced not available for R S ESU ESIB INPut 1 2 TYPE INPUT1 INPUT2 not available for R S ESU FSE INPut 1 2 UPORt 1 2 STATe ON OFF not available for R S ESU FSE INPut 1 2 UPORt 1 2 VALue not available for R S ESU ESIB INPut2 COUPling AC DC not available for R S ESU INSTrument C...

Page 754: ...Mory CLear STATe 1 path R S ESU FSE MMEMory COMMent string R S ESU FSE MMEMory COPY path file path file R S ESU FSE MMEMory DATA filename block data R S ESU FSE MMEMory DELete path filename R S ESU FSE MMEMory LOAD AUTO 1 path R S ESU FSE MMEMory LOAD STATe 1 path R S ESU FSE MMEMory MDIRectory path R S ESU FSE MMEMory MOVE path R S ESU FSE MMEMory MSIS F D R S ESU valid drives are F and D FSE val...

Page 755: ...n the R S ESU FSE MMEMory SELect ITEM MACRos ON OFF not available for R S ESU R S ESU FSE MMEMory SELect ITEM NONE R S ESU FSE MMEMory SELect ITEM SCData ON OFF R S ESU MMEMory SELect ITEM TRACe ACTive ON OFF no numeric suffixes behind TRACe FSE MMEMory SELect ITEM TRACe 1 4 ON OFF numeric suffixes behind TRACe FSE MMEMory SELect ITEM TRANsducer ALL ON OFF not available for R S ESU FSE MMEMory SEL...

Page 756: ...t POWer LEVel not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE READ BURSt POWer STATic not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE READ BURSt POWer not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE READ BURSt REFerence IMMediate not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE READ SPECtrum MODulation ALL not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE READ SPECtrum SWITching ALL not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE READ SPURious STEP not ...

Page 757: ...H MEDium LOW not available for R S ESU R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo 1Hz to 10MHz FSET SENSe 1 2 BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo 1Hz to 500MHz R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO ON OFF FSET SENSe 1 2 BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo EXTernal STATe ON OFF not available for R S ESU R S ESU SENSe 1 2 BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio 0 0001 to 1 only numeric values available Parameter ranges di...

Page 758: ...tion CVL CATalog not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE SENSe 1 2 CORRection CVL CLEar not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE SENSe 1 2 CORRection CVL COMMent string not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE SENSe 1 2 CORRection CVL DATA freq level to not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE SENSe 1 2 CORRection CVL MIXer string not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE SENSe 1 2 CORRection CVL PORTs 2 3 ...

Page 759: ...ot available for R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 CORRection TSET BREak ON OFF not available for R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 CORRection TSET CATalog not available for R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 CORRection TSET COMMent string not available for R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 CORRection TSET DELete not available for R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 CORRection TSET RANGe 1 10 freq freq name to not available for R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 CORRectio...

Page 760: ...SU FSE ESIB SENSe 1 2 DDEMod PRESet GSM EDGe NADC TETRa DCS1800 PCS1900 PHS PDCup PDCDown APCO25CQPSK APCO25C4FM CDPD DECT CT2 ERMes MODacom PWT TFTS F16 F322 F324 F64 FQCDma RQCDma FNADc RNADc BPSK18 GMSK18 QPSK18 GMSK36 not available for R S ESU FSIQ SENSe 1 2 DDEMod PRESet GSM EDGe NADC TETRa PHS PDCup PDCDown APCO25CQPSK APCO25C4FM CDPD DECT CT2 ERMes MODacom PWT TFTS F16 F322 F324 F64 FWCDma ...

Page 761: ...C OFFSet numeric_value not available for R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern string not available for R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect string not available for R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe ON OFF not available for R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 DDEMod SEARch TIME 100 to 1600 not available for R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 DDEMod SRATe 160 Hz to 1 6 MHz not available fo...

Page 762: ...ailable for R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 FILTer CCITt STATe ON OFF not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE SENSe 1 2 FILTer CMESsage STATe ON OFF not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE SENSe 1 2 FILTer DEMPhasis LINK DISPlay AUDio not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE SENSe 1 2 FILTer DEMPhasis TCONstant numeric_value not available for R S ESU and FSET FSE SENSe 1 2 FILTer DEMPhasis STATe ON OFF not avai...

Page 763: ...uency ranges are different for R S ESU and FSE R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 FREQuency SPAN FULL FSE SENSe 1 2 FREQuency SPAN LINK CENTer STOP SPAN not available for R S ESU R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 FREQuency STARt 0 to fmax frequency ranges are different for R S ESU and FSE FSET SENSe 1 2 FREQuency STARt FLINe STATe ON OFF not available for R S ESU Replaced by CALC MARK FUNC SLIMits FSE SENSe 1 2 FREQuency ...

Page 764: ...ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 MIXer BIAS LIMit MAX numeric_value not available for R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 MIXer BLOCk ON OFF not available for R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 MIXer HARMonic numeric_value not available for R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 MIXer HARMonic BAND A Q U V E W F D G Y J not available for R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 MIXer HARMonic TYPE ODD EVEN EODD not available for R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 MIXer LOSS HIGH numeric...

Page 765: ... FSE SENSe 1 2 MSUMmary RUNit PCT DB not available for R S ESU and FSET FSET SENSe 1 2 PM DEViation RANGe UPPer numeric_value not available for R S ESU R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 POWer ACHannel ACPairs 0 to 3 R S ESU new parameter value 0 for channel power measurement R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ACHannel 100 to 1000MHz R S ESU parameter range starts at 100Hz FSE parameter rang...

Page 766: ...dth BWIDth 10 to 99 9PCT different parameter range R S ESU SENSe 1 2 POWer HSPeed ON OFF new function for R S ESU R S ESU SENSe 1 2 POWer NCORrection ON OFF new function for R S ESU R S ESU SENSe 1 2 POWer TRACe 1 to 3 new function for R S ESU R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 ROSCillator INTernal TUNe 0 to 4095 R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 ROSCillator INTernal TUNe SAVe FSE SENSe 1 2 ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency ...

Page 767: ...Se 1 2 SWEep EGATe ON OFF R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 SWEep EGATe HOLDoff 0 to 100s R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 SWEep EGATe LENGth 0 to 100s FSE SENSe 1 2 SWEep EGATe LENGth 0 to 100s FSE SENSe 1 2 SWEep EGATe LEVel 5V to 5V not availabe for R S ESU R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 SWEep EGATe POLarity POSitive NEGative R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 SWEep EGATe SOURce EXTernal IFPower RFPower R S ESU FSE SENSe 1 2 SWEep EGATe T...

Page 768: ...ric_value new command for R S ESU R S ESU SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor NUMerator numeric_value new command for R S ESU R S ESU SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor DENominator numeric_value new command for R S ESU R S ESU SOURce EXTernal FREQuency SWEep STATe ON OFF new command for R S ESU R S ESU SOURce EXTernal POWer LEVel numeric_value new command for R S ESU R S ESU FSE SOURce FM STATe ON OFF ...

Page 769: ... ESU FSE STATus QUEStionable FREQuency ENABle 0 to 65535 R S ESU FSE STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition 0 to 65535 R S ESU FSE STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition 0 to 65535 R S ESU FSE STATus QUEStionable FREQuency EVENt R S ESU FSE STATus QUEStionable LIMit 1 2 CONDition R S ESU individual registers for screen A and B R S ESU FSE STATus QUEStionable LIMit 1 2 ENABle 0 to 65535 R S E...

Page 770: ...5535 R S ESU FSE STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRansition 0 to 65535 R S ESU FSE STATus QUEStionable POWer PTRansition 0 to 65535 R S ESU FSE STATus QUEStionable POWer EVENt R S ESU FSE STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 0 to 65535 R S ESU FSE STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition R S ESU FSE STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle 0 to 65535 R S ESU FSE STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition 0 to 65535 R S ESU FSE ...

Page 771: ... GENerator 1 2 LINK GPIB TTL new function for R S ESU R S ESU SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator 1 2 TYPE name new function for R S ESU R S ESU FSE SYSTem COMMunicate SERial CONTrol DTR IBFull OFF only SERial1 available for R S ESU R S ESU FSE SYSTem COMMunicate SERial CONTrol RTS IBFull OFF only SERial1 available for R S ESU R S ESU FSE SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RECeive BAUD 110 300 600 1200 24...

Page 772: ... FSE SYSTem PASSword CENable pass word R S ESU FSE SYSTem PRESet ESIB FSIQ SYSTem PRESet COMPatible FSE OFF not available for R S ESU R S ESU FSE SYSTem SET R S ESU FSE SYSTem SPEaker VOLume 0 to 1 R S ESU FSE SYSTem TIME 0 to 23 0 to 59 0 to 59 R S ESU FSE SYSTem VERSion R S ESU FSE TRACe COPY TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 only TRACE1 TRACE3 available for R S ESU FSET ESIB TRACe FEED ...

Page 773: ...o 5 0V not available for R S ESU R S ESU TRIGger 1 2 SEQuence LEVel IFPower numeric_value new command for R S ESU R S ESU FSE TRIGger 1 2 SEQuence SLOPe POSitive NEGative R S ESU TRIGger 1 2 SEQuence SOURce IMMediate LINE EXTernal VIDeo IFPower FSE ESIB TRIGger 1 2 SEQuence SOURce IMMediate LINE EXTernal VIDeo RFPower TV AF FSIQ TRIGger 1 2 SEQuence SOURce IMMediate LINE EXTernal VIDeo RFPower AF ...

Page 774: ...TRIGger 1 2 SEQuence SYNChronize SOURce FRAMe TSC not available for R S ESU and FSET R S ESU UNIT 1 2 POWer DBM DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMP V A W available units are compatible to the FSE FSE FSIQ UNIT 1 2 POWer DBM DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMP DB PCT UNITLESS DBUV_MHZ DBMV_MHZ DBUA_MHZ DBUV_M DBIA_M DBUV_MMHZ DBUA_MMHZ for R S ESU the following units apply DBM DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT ...

Page 775: ... X RANGe 1dB to 200dB 6 93 CALCulate STATistics SCALe X RLEVel 130dBm to 30dBm 6 92 CALCulate STATistics SCALe Y LOWer 1E 9 to 0 1 6 93 CALCulate STATistics SCALe Y UNIT PCT ABS 6 93 CALCulate STATistics SCALe Y UPPer 1E 8 to 1 0 6 93 CALCulate 1 2 DELTamarker 1 4 AOFF 6 13 CALCulate 1 2 DELTamarker 1 4 FUNCtion FIXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK numeric_value 6 18 CALCulate 1 2 DELTamarker 1 4 FUNCtion FI...

Page 776: ...Power ACHannel RESult 6 29 CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 ACPower ALTernate 1 to 11 ABSolute 200DBM to 200DBM 200DBM to 200DBM 6 31 CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 ACPower ALTernate 1 to 11 ABSolute STATe ON OFF 6 32 CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 ACPower ALTernate 1 to 11 RELative 0 to 100dB 0 to 100dB 6 30 CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 ACPower ALTernate 1 to 11 RELative STATe ON OFF 6 30 CALCulate 1 2 LIMit 1 8 ACPower ALT...

Page 777: ...ch LEVel 0 to 100 PCT 6 58 CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion DEModulation SQUelch STATe ON OFF 6 57 CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion DEModulation STATe ON OFF 6 57 CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt 6 51 CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate numeric_value 6 51 CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion FPEaks SORT X Y 6 53 CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion FPEaks X 6 52 CALCulate ...

Page 778: ...UMMary AVERage ON OFF 6 84 CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN AVERage RESult 6 80 CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN PHOLd RESult 6 81 CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN RESult 6 80 CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN STATe ON OFF 6 79 CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion SUMMary MODE ABSolute RELative 6 84 CALCulate 1 2 MARKer 1 4 FUNCtion SUMMary PHOLd...

Page 779: ...ate 1 2 MATH MODE LINear LOGarithmic POWer 6 88 CALCulate 1 2 MATH POSition 100PCT to 200PCT 6 87 CALCulate 1 2 MATH STATe ON OFF 6 87 CALCulate 1 2 PEAKsearch PSEarch ADD nummeric value 6 89 CALCulate 1 2 PEAKsearch PSEarch AUTO ON OFF 6 89 CALCulate 1 2 PEAKsearch PSEarch CLEar IMMediate 6 89 CALCulate 1 2 PEAKsearch PSEarch IMMediate 6 89 CALCulate 1 2 PEAKsearch PSEarch MARGin MINimum MAXimum ...

Page 780: ...E HCONtinuous ON OFF 6 112 DISPlay WINDow 1 2 TRACe 1 3 STATe ON OFF 6 112 DISPlay WINDow 1 2 TRACe 1 3 SYMBol CROSs OFF 6 112 DISPlay WINDow 1 2 TRACe 1 3 X SCALe ZOOM ON OFF 6 108 DISPlay WINDow 1 2 TRACe 1 3 X SPACing LINear LOGarithmic 6 108 DISPlay WINDow 1 2 TRACe 1 3 Y SCALe 10dB to 200dB 6 109 DISPlay WINDow 1 2 TRACe 1 3 Y SCALe BOTTom numeric_value 6 110 DISPlay WINDow 1 2 TRACe 1 3 Y SC...

Page 781: ...ucer STATe ON OFF 6 123 HCOPy TREPort NEW 6 120 HOLD 6 11 INITiate 1 2 CONMeas 6 125 INITiate 1 2 CONTinuous ON OFF 6 125 INITiate 1 2 DISPlay ON OFF 6 127 INITiate 1 2 EMITest 6 128 INITiate 1 2 ESPectrum 6 127 INITiate 1 2 FMEasurement 6 127 INITiate 1 2 IMMediate 6 126 INITiate 1 2 SPURious 6 128 INPut 1 2 ATTenuation 0 to 75 dB 6 129 INPut 1 2 ATTenuation AUTO ON OFF 6 129 INPut 1 2 ATTenuatio...

Page 782: ...ame 6 144 MMEMory RDIRectory directory_name 6 144 MMEMory SELect ITEM ALL 6 145 MMEMory SELect ITEM CLISt ON OFF 6 145 MMEMory SELect ITEM DEFault 6 145 MMEMory SELect ITEM FINal ON OFF 6 146 MMEMory SELect ITEM HCOPy ON OFF 6 144 MMEMory SELect ITEM HWSettings ON OFF 6 146 MMEMory SELect ITEM LINes ALL ON OFF 6 146 MMEMory SELect ITEM NONE 6 147 MMEMory SELect ITEM SCData ON OFF 6 147 MMEMory SEL...

Page 783: ...ection TSET COMMent string 6 164 SENSe 1 2 CORRection TSET DELete 6 165 SENSe 1 2 CORRection TSET RANGe 1 to 10 freq freq name 6 164 SENSe 1 2 CORRection TSET SELect name 6 163 SENSe 1 2 CORRection TSET STATe ON OFF 6 165 SENSe 1 2 CORRection TSET UNIT string 6 163 SENSe 1 2 CORRection YIG TEMPerature AUTO ON OFF 6 165 SENSe 1 2 DEMod OFF AM FM 6 166 SENSe 1 2 DEMod SQUelch LEVel numeric_value MIN...

Page 784: ...ENSe 1 2 FMEasurement THReshold STATe ON OFF 6 177 SENSe 1 2 FMEasurement TIME numeric_value 6 179 SENSe 1 2 FREQuency CENTer 0 to fmax 6 180 SENSe 1 2 FREQuency CENTer STEP 0 to fmax 6 180 SENSe 1 2 FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK SPAN RBW OFF 6 180 SENSe 1 2 FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor 1 to 100 PCT 6 180 SENSe 1 2 FREQuency MODE CW FIXed SWEep SCAN TDOMain 6 181 SENSe 1 2 FREQuency OFFSet numer...

Page 785: ... FILTer STATe ALTernate 1 to 11 ON OFF 6 202 SENSe 1 2 POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe CHANnel 1 12 ON OFF 6 202 SENSe 1 2 POWer ACHannel MODE ABSolute RELative 6 202 SENSe 1 2 POWer ACHannel PRESet ACPower CPOWer MCACpower OBANdwidth OBWidth CN CN0 6 204 SENSe 1 2 POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel 6 204 SENSe 1 2 POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel OFFSet 0 100 dB 6 203 SENSe 1 2 POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ON...

Page 786: ...219 SENSe 1 2 SWEep TIME 10 µs to 100 s receiver 2 5 ms to 16000 s frequency domain 1 µs to 16000 s time domain 6 213 SENSe 1 2 SWEep TIME AUTO ON OFF 6 213 SOURce 1 2 AM STATe ON OFF 6 220 SOURce 1 2 DM STATe ON OFF 6 220 SOURce 1 2 EXTernal 1 2 FREQuency FACTor DENominator numeric_value 6 223 SOURce 1 2 EXTernal 1 2 FREQuency FACTor NUMerator numeric_value 6 224 SOURce 1 2 EXTernal 1 2 FREQuency...

Page 787: ...ble POWer PTRansition 0 to 65535 6 229 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 0 to 65535 6 228 STATus QUEStionable TRANsducer CONDition 6 233 STATus QUEStionable TRANsducer ENABle 0 to 65535 6 233 STATus QUEStionable TRANsducer EVENt 6 233 STATus QUEStionable TRANsducer NTRansition 0 to 65535 6 234 STATus QUEStionable TRANsducer PTRansition 0 to 65535 6 234 STATus QUEue NEXT 6 234 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB...

Page 788: ...IMMediate LEVel 6 250 TRACe 1 2 IMMediate RESult 6 250 TRACe 1 2 IQ DATA FORMat COMPatible IQBLock IQPair 6 254 TRACe 1 2 IQ DATA MEMory RF offset samples of samples 6 255 TRACe 1 2 IQ DATA 6 252 TRACe 1 2 IQ FILTer FLATness NORMal WIDE 6 258 TRACe 1 2 IQ SET filter type rbw sample rate trigger source trigger slope pretrigger samples of samples 6 256 TRACe 1 2 IQ SRATe 10 0 kHz to 81 6 MHz 6 257 T...

Page 789: ...R S ESU Remote Control Description of Commands Alphabetical List of Remote Commands 6 350 Operating Manual 1302 6163 12 03 ...

Page 790: ... 74 1 2Shape Factor Measurement Using n dB Down 7 9 7 74 1 3Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point 7 10 7 74 1 4Measuring the AM Modulation Depth 7 12 7 74 2 Limit Lines and Limit Test 7 13 7 74 3 Measuring the Channel and Adjacent Channel Power 7 15 7 74 4 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement 7 17 7 74 5 Time Domain Power Measurement 7 18 7 74 6 Fast Power Measurement on Power Ramps 7 19 7 74 6 1Pow...

Page 791: ...Arrival of a Service Request on page 7 3 Waiting Without Blocking the Keyboard and Mouse on page 7 5 Service Request Routine on page 7 6 Evaluation of SCPI Status Registers on page 7 6 Evaluation of Event Status Register on page 7 7 Basic examples that explain the programming of the instrument and can serve as a basis to solve more complex programming tasks are provided in the Quick Start Guide ch...

Page 792: ... 7 2 1 2 Waiting for the Arrival of a Service Request There are basically two methods of waiting for the arrival of a service request Blocking user inputs not possible This method is appropriate if the waiting time until the event to be signalled by an SRQ is short shorter than the selected time out if no response to user inputs is required during the waiting time and if as the main criterion the ...

Page 793: ...ay the system can respond to user inputs mouse clicks key entries during the waiting time A query of the VI_ATTR_GPIB_SRQ_STATE attribute can only be sent from the controller not from the instrument Therefore the handle of the controller board is used for this calling of the viGetAttribute attribute It is advisable to employ the Hold auxiliary function which returns control to the operating system...

Page 794: ...e operation of buttons and input fields while the user waits for an instrument setting to be completed The following programming example describes the Hold function which returns control to the operating system for the period of the waiting time selectable in milli seconds Rem Rem The waiting function below expects the transfer of the desired Rem waiting time in milliseconds The keyboard and the m...

Page 795: ... Operationstatus IF STB AND 32 0 THEN CALL Esrread END IF noDevice END SUB REM Reading out the status event registers the output buffer and the error event queue is effected in subroutines 7 2 1 5 Evaluation of SCPI Status Registers REM Subroutine for evaluating Questionable Status Register Public SUB Questionablestatus Ques SPACE 20 Preallocate blanks to text variable status viWrite analyzer STAT...

Page 796: ... status viRead analyzer Esr 20 retCnt IF VAL Esr AND 1 0 THEN PRINT Operation complete IF VAL Esr AND 2 0 THEN PRINT Request Control IF VAL Esr AND 4 0 THEN PRINT Query Error IF VAL Esr AND 8 0 THEN PRINT Device dependent error IF VAL Esr AND 16 0 THEN PRINT Execution Error Program aborted Output error message STOP Stop software END IF IF VAL Esr AND 32 0 THEN PRINT Command Error Program aborted O...

Page 797: ...arker and Delta Marker 7 3 1 1 Measuring Spurious Emissions In transmission measurements it is often necessary to search a large frequency range for unwanted spurious emissions This can be done by means of the R S ESU s LIST PEAKS function which finds up to 50 peaks in a preselected frequency range and outputs them as a list The search range can be defined both in terms of frequency and level and ...

Page 798: ...21 retCnt Query and read status viRead analyzer freqlist 1000 retCnt frequency list status viWrite analyzer CALC MARK FUNC FPE Y 21 retCnt Query and read status viRead analyzer powerlist 1000 retCnt level list Print of spurious countstr Output number of results Print Frequencies freqlist Output frequency list Print Power powerlist Output level list END SUB REM 7 3 1 2 Shape Factor Measurement Usin...

Page 799: ...23 retCnt Read out bandwidth measured status viWrite analyzer CALC MARK FUNC NDBD RES 24 retCnt at 60 dB status viRead analyzer result 100 retCnt result3 Val result Read out shape factor Print Shapefaktor 60dB 3dB result60 result3 END SUB REM 7 3 1 3 Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point The third order intercept point TOI is the virtual level of two adjacent useful signals at which the interm...

Page 800: ...lyzer SYST DISP UPD ON 16 retCnt ON display on OFF off Set frequency status viWrite analyzer FREQ STARt 85MHz STOP 125 MHz 29 retCnt Span Set level status viWrite analyzer DISP WIND TRAC Y RLEV 20dBm 28 retCnt Reference level status viWrite analyzer INIT WAI 4 retCnt Perform sweep with sync TOI measurement status viWrite analyzer CALC MARK PEXC 6DB 18 retCnt Peak excursion status viWrite analyzer ...

Page 801: ...LL SetupInstrument Default setting Peak search status viWrite analyzer INIT CONT OFF 13 retCnt Single sweep status viWrite analyzer INIT WAI 9 retCnt Perform sweep with sync status viWrite analyzer CALC MARK PEXC 6DB 18 retCnt Peak excursion status viWrite analyzer CALC MARK STAT ON 17 retCnt Marker 1 on status viWrite analyzer CALC MARK TRAC 1 16 retCnt Assign marker1 to trace1 Measure modulation...

Page 802: ...ne result Space 100 R S ESU default setting CALL SetupInstrument Default setting status viWrite analyzer FREQUENCY CENTER 128MHz Span 10MHz 34 retCnt Span status viWrite analyzer Diag Serv Inp Cal CSO 30dBm 28 retCnt Cal signal on Definition of limit lines status viWrite analyzer CALC LIM5 NAME TEST1 22 retCnt Define name status viWrite analyzer CALC LIM5 COMM Upper limit 28 retCnt Define comment ...

Page 803: ...iWrite analyzer CALC1 LIM5 STAT ON 18 retCnt Activate limit check in screen A status viWrite analyzer INIT WAI 9 retCnt Perform sweep with sync status viWrite analyzer CALC1 LIM5 FAIL 16 retCnt Query result of limit check status viRead analyzer result 100 retCnt Result 1 FAIL Read out result Print Limit Result Line 5 result Evaluate limit line in screen A by means of status register status viWrite...

Page 804: ...tCnt ON display on OFF off Set frequency status viWrite analyzer FREQ CENT 800MHz 16 retCnt Set frequency Set level status viWrite analyzer DISP WIND TRAC Y RLEV 10dBm 27 retCnt Reference level Example 1 Configure CP ACP for CDMA status viWrite analyzer CALC2 MARK FUNC POW SEL ACP 27 retCnt ACP measurement on status viWrite analyzer CALC MARK FUNC POW PRES F8CDMA 30 retCnt Select CDMA800 FWD statu...

Page 805: ...atus viWrite analyzer SENS POW ACH PRES ACP 21 retCnt Optimize settings status viWrite analyzer SENS POW ACH PRES RLEV WAI 27 retCnt Optimize reference level status viWrite analyzer SENS POW ACH MODE ABS 21 retCnt Absolute measurement Start measurement and query result status viWrite analyzer INIT WAI 9 retCnt Perform sweep with sync status viWrite analyzer CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP 27 retCnt Que...

Page 806: ... CALL SetupStatusReg Set status register status viWrite analyzer RST 4 retCnt Reset instrument status viWrite analyzer INST SEL SAN 12 retCnt Change into analyzer mode status viWrite analyzer INIT CONT OFF 13 retCnt Single sweep status viWrite analyzer SYST DISP UPD ON 16 retCnt ON display on OFF off Configure R S ESU for OBW for GSM status viWrite analyzer FREQ CENT 935 2MHz 18 retCnt Set frequen...

Page 807: ...t Space 100 R S ESU default setting CALL SetupStatusReg Set status register status viWrite analyzer RST 4 retCnt Reset instrument status viWrite analyzer INST SEL SAN 12 retCnt Change into analyzer mode status viWrite analyzer INIT CONT OFF 13 retCnt Single sweep status viWrite analyzer SYST DISP UPD ON 16 retCnt ON display on OFF off Configure R S ESU for time domain power measurement status viWr...

Page 808: ...e used depending on the signal characteristics In the following the two methods are presented by means of two examples 7 3 6 1 Power Measurement with Multi Summary Marker The multi summary marker function is suitable for measuring the power of a sequence of pulses with the following characteristics The pulses occur at identical time intervals which is typical of GSM transmission in slots for examp...

Page 809: ...tCnt Single sweep mode status viWrite analyzer SYST DISP UPD ON 16 retCnt ON switch display on OFF switch display off Configure R S ESU for power measurement in time domain status viWrite analyzer FREQ CENT 935 2MHz SPAN 0Hz 27 retCnt Frequency setting status viWrite analyzer DISP WIND TRAC Y RLEV 10dBm 27 retCnt Set reference level to 10 dB status viWrite analyzer INP ATT 30 dB 13 retCnt Set inpu...

Page 810: ...SUB REM 7 3 6 2 Multi Burst Power Measurement The multi burst power measurement function is suitable for measuring the power of a sequence of pulses with the following characteristics The pulses occur at variable time intervals The levels of all pulses of the sequence are reliably above the trigger threshold or an external trigger signal is used The function requires one trigger event per pulse Th...

Page 811: ...nt each pulse is mapped into a pixel of the screen i e any change of the trace can be detected only at the left hand edge of the screen Maxi mum measurement speed is as usual achieved with the display switched off In the example below a GSM pulse sequence of 8 pulses is measured with 5 µs trigger offset 434 µs measurement time pulse video trigger with 50 trigger thresh old and peak detection REM P...

Page 812: ... measurement and query results cmd MPOW cmd cmd 935 2 MHZ Center frequency cmd cmd 1MHZ Resolution bandwidth cmd cmd 434US Measurement time cmd cmd VID Trigger source cmd cmd 50PCT Trigger threshold cmd cmd 1US Trigger offset must be 125 ns cmd cmd PEAK Peak detector cmd cmd 8 Number of bursts status viWrite analyzer cmd 47 retCnt status viRead analyzer result 100 retCnt Read results Print result ...

Page 813: ...n be programmed but also the measurement types PEAK RMS AVG to be performed simultaneously can be selected The example below describes a harmonics measurement on a dual band amplifier The harmonics level in general decreases as the frequency increases To boost measurement sensitivity therefore the reference level is lowered by 10 dB from the third harmonic The following settings are used Reference...

Page 814: ...ment based on frequency list status viWrite analyzer TRIG LEV VID 45PCT 18 retCnt Video trigger threshold status viWrite analyzer LIST POWer SET ON ON OFF VID POS 100us 0 40 retCnt Perform measurement and query results cmd LIST POWer cmd cmd 935 2MHZ 10dBm 20dB OFF NORM 1MHz 3MHz 300us 0 cmd cmd 1805 2MHZ 10dBm 20dB OFF NORM 1MHz 3MHz 300us 0 cmd cmd 1870 4MHZ 10dBm 20dB OFF NORM 1MHz 3MHz 300us 0...

Page 815: ...simulated cable correction The factor is defined and can be activated as required REM Public Sub TransducerFactor Define transducer factor status viWrite analyzer CORR TRAN SEL TRANSTEST 25 retCnt Define Transtest transducer factor status viWrite analyzer CORR TRAN UNIT DB 19 retCnt Unit dB status viWrite analyzer CORR TRAN SCAL LIN 18 retCnt Linear frequency axis status viWrite analyzer CORR TRAN...

Page 816: ... input In binary format the length information carried in the message header is evaluated and used for calculating the x axis values Binary data is read in three steps 1 The number of digits carrying the length information is read 2 The length information itself is read 3 The trace data is read This procedure is necessary with programming languages like Visual Basic which support only structures o...

Page 817: ... from device They have the following format Example 42000 ______ Length of data in bytes __________ No of digits as length status viRead analyzer result 2 retCnt Read and store length for digits Val Mid result 2 1 number of digits result Space 100 Re initialize buffer status viRead analyzer result digits retCnt Read length Total number of bytes that are read IQBytes Val Left result digits and stor...

Page 818: ... BlockSize LastSize 4 retCnt status viRead32 analyzer QData Blocks BlockSize LastSize 4 retCnt End If End If status viRead analyzer result 1 retCnt Read in end character NL status viWrite analyzer TRAC IQ STAT OFF 16 retCnt I Q data acquisition mode status viWrite analyzer DISP WIND Trac Stat on 22 retCnt Re start screen status viWrite analyzer INIT CONT ON 13 retCnt continuous sweep on Output of ...

Page 819: ... results Default setting of status register Call SetupStatusReg Configure status register Read out file status viWrite analyzer MMEM DATA D USER DATA TEST1 SET 35 retCnt Select file status viRead analyzer result 2 retCnt Read and store number of digits Val Mid result 2 1 digits of length information status viRead analyzer result digits retCnt Read and store length fileBytes Val Left result digits ...

Page 820: ...er for simple results Default setting of status register Call SetupStatusReg Configure status register Prepare the definite length block data fileBytes FileLen test1 set Determine length of file fileSize Str fileBytes digits Len fileSize 1 Determine number of digits of fileSize Right fileSize digits length information FileBuffer Right Str digits 1 fileSize Store length information in file buffer R...

Page 821: ...R S ESU Remote Control Programming Examples More Complex Programming Examples 7 32 Operating Manual 1302 6163 12 03 ...

Page 822: ...nes 8 7 8 79 3 3Transmission Parameters 8 8 8 79 3 4Control Characters 8 9 8 79 3 5Handshake 8 9 8 1 Introduction The following chapter contains information on the maintenance of the R S ESU and on the instrument interfaces Maintenance on page 8 2 Instrument Interfaces on page 8 2 Please follow the instructions in the service manual when exchanging modules or ordering spares The order no for spare...

Page 823: ...e 8 2 Printer Interface LPT on page 8 5 RS 232 C Interface COM on page 8 7 For further information on the front and back panel connectors refer to the Quick Start Guide chapter 1 8 3 1 GPIB Interface The standard instrument is equipped with an GPIB connector An IEEE 488 interface connector is located on the rear panel of the R S ESU An external controller for remote control of the instrument can b...

Page 824: ... is the least significant DIO8 the most significant bit Control bus with 5 lines IFC Interface Clear active low resets the interfaces of the devices connected to the default setting ATN Attention active low signals the transmission of interface messages inactive high signals the transmission of device messages SRQ Service Request active low enables a device connected to send a service request to t...

Page 825: ...n page 8 5 Interface Messages Interface messages are transferred on the data lines of the GPIB when the ATN control line is active LOW They are used for communication between controller and instruments and can only be sent by the controller which currently has control of the GPIB Universal Commands The universal commands are encoded 10 1F hex They affect all instruments con nected to the bus witho...

Page 826: ...r CHR 20 Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument settings IFC Interface Clear IBSIC controller Resets the interfaces to the default setting LLO Local Lockout IBCMD controller CHR 17 The LOC IEC ADDR key is disabled SPE Serial Poll Enable IBCMD controller CHR 24 Ready for serial poll SPD S...

Page 827: ...e printer is ready to receive the next byte active LOW 11 BUSY I Signal is active when the printer cannot accept data active HIGH 12 PE I Signal is active when the paper tray is empty active HIGH 13 SELECT I Signal is active when the printer is selected active HIGH 14 AUTOFEED O When signal is active the printer automatically performs a line feed after each line active LOW 15 ERROR I This signal i...

Page 828: ...gnal from 15 V to 3 V External instrument controller can be connected Fig 8 52 Pin assignment of the RS 232 C interface 8 3 3 2 Signal Lines DCD Data Carrier Detect Not used in R S ESU Input active LOW Using this signal the local terminal recognizes that the modem of the remote station receives valid signals with sufficient level DCD is used to disable the receiver in the local terminal and preven...

Page 829: ...he same settings The parameters are defined in the SETUP GENERAL SETUP menu Example Transmission of character A 41 hex in 7 bit ASCII code with even parity and 2 stop bits Transmission rate baud rate The following transmission rates can be set in the instrument 110 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 138000 Data bits Data transmission is in 7 or 8 bit ASCII code The first bit tran...

Page 830: ...roller indicates to the instrument that it is ready to receive data in the same way Cable required for software handshake The connection of the instrument with a controller for software handshake is made by crossing the data lines The following wiring diagram applies to a controller with a 9 pin or 25 pin configuration Fig 8 53 Wiring of the data lines for software handshake Control string or char...

Page 831: ... logic 0 on both lines activates the data output and a logic 1 on both lines stops the data output of the instrument The data output takes place via the TxD line Cable for hardware handshake The connection of the instrument to a controller is made with a so called zero modem cable Here the data control and acknowledge lines must be crossed The following wiring diagram applies to a controller with ...

Page 832: ...Operating Manual 1302 6163 12 03 9 1 R S ESU Error Messages 9 Error Messages 9 80 Introduction 9 2 9 81 SCPI Specific Error Messages 9 3 9 82 Device Specific Messages 9 8 ...

Page 833: ...following answer to the query SYS Tem ERRor 113 Undefined header TEST COMMAND The subsequent list contains the description of error texts displayed on the instru ment Distinction is made between error messages defined by SCPI which are marked by negative error codes and the device specific error messages for which positive error codes are used 9 2 SCPI Specific Error Messages on page 9 3 Device Sp...

Page 834: ...lon is missing after the command 104 Data type error The command contains an invalid value indication Example ON is indicated instead of a numeric value for frequency setting 105 GET not allowed A Group Execute Trigger GET is within a command line 108 Parameter not allowed The command contains too many parameters Example Command SENSe FREQuency CENTer permits only one frequency indication 109 Miss...

Page 835: ...trument Example nHz is not defined 134 Suffix too long The suffix contains more than 12 characters 138 Suffix not allowed A suffix is not allowed for this command or at this position of the command Example The command RCL does not permit a suffix to be indicated 140 Character data error The command contains a faulty text parameter 141 Invalid character data The text parameter either contains an in...

Page 836: ... data not allowed The command contains a mathematical expression at an invalid position Error code Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation 200 Execution error Error on execution of the command 201 Invalid while in local The command is not executable while the device is in local due to a hard local control Example The device receives a command which would change the rotary knob state...

Page 837: ...ge The parameter value lies out of the allowed range of the instrument 223 Too much data The command contains too many data Example The instrument does not have sufficient storage space 224 Illegal parameter value The parameter value is invalid Example The text parameter is invalid TRIGger SWEep SOURce TASTe 230 Data corrupt or stale The data are incomplete or invalid Example The instrument has ab...

Page 838: ...pression error The expression contains an error Error code Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation 300 Device specific error R S ESU specific error not defined in greater detail 310 System error This error message suggests an error within the instrument Please inform the R S Service 313 Calibration memory lost Loss of the non volatile data stored using the CAL command This error occ...

Page 839: ...CALAMP1 and CALAMP2 on IF board This message is output when the setting range of the calibration amplifier is not sufficient for the required correction The error occurs only with modules which are not correctly adjusted or defective 1052 Frontend LO is Unlocked This message is output when the phase regulation of the local oscillator fails in the RF frontend 1060 Trigger Block Gate Delay Error gat...

Page 840: ...n the selected printer is not included in the list of available output devices A possible cause is that the required printer driver is missing or incorrectly installed 2034 CPU Temperature is too high This message is output when the temperature of the processor exceeds 70 C Error code Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation ...

Page 841: ...R S ESU Error Messages Device Specific Messages 9 10 Operating Manual 1302 6163 12 03 ...

Page 842: ...meter 5 14 Brightness 4 259 screen 4 312 C Cables EZ xx 4 50 Calibration functioning 4 327 4 341 reflection measurement 4 327 4 341 results 4 144 transmission measurement 4 321 CCDF function 4 202 Center frequency 4 103 step size 4 103 Channel bandwidth 4 186 4 197 4 210 filters 4 23 number 4 185 4 186 power 4 190 spacing 4 187 Channel filters 4 118 Channel power measurement 4 179 Characters speci...

Page 843: ... deactivation during single sweep 4 122 power save mode 4 258 saturation 4 260 time 4 257 tint 4 259 title 4 257 Display line 4 250 Display mode split screen 4 254 Display range frequency 4 103 level 4 16 4 80 4 110 span 4 106 Distribution function 4 202 Double dagger 5 15 E ENABle part status register 5 20 Error messages 4 292 9 2 device specific 9 8 SPCI specific 9 3 Error queue query 5 32 Error...

Page 844: ... Interrupt 5 31 scan 4 62 IP ADDRESS 4 286 IST flag 5 23 K Key AMPT 4 16 4 80 4 107 BW 4 112 CAL 4 143 DISP 4 252 ESC 6 25 FILE 4 299 FREQ 4 14 4 102 LINES 4 241 4 250 MEAS 4 25 4 169 MKR 4 64 4 83 4 145 MKR FCTN 4 69 4 84 4 152 MKR 4 65 4 85 4 162 PRESET 4 6 6 10 6 244 SETUP 4 260 SPAN 4 106 SWEEP 4 51 4 55 4 120 TRACE 4 71 4 91 4 130 TRIG 4 63 4 122 L Level 4 107 display 4 80 display range 4 16 ...

Page 845: ...sis 4 78 receiver 4 11 spectrum analysis 4 102 Modulation depth 4 210 external tracking generator 4 330 N Network 4 319 Noise correction 4 181 measurement 4 153 source external 4 297 Normalization 4 323 4 337 NTRansition register part 5 19 Numerical values command 5 13 O Occupied bandwidth 4 197 Offset frequency 4 105 frequency ext generator 4 343 gate signal 4 127 level tracking generator 4 320 l...

Page 846: ...ing system 5 33 Resolution bandwidth 4 21 4 80 4 112 Resolution counter 4 151 RF attenuation 4 16 4 81 4 109 RFI reception 4 11 4 78 RMS detector 4 28 4 30 4 138 4 141 RMS value 4 171 RS 232 C configuration 4 283 interface 8 7 S Sample detector 4 141 Sample number 4 203 Saturation 4 260 screen 4 312 Save configuration 4 299 limit line 4 250 measurement 4 299 Scalar reflection measurement 4 326 4 3...

Page 847: ... 256 BLANK 4 72 4 93 4 133 6 112 BRIGHTNESS4 259 4 312 6 105 6 115 C N 4 209 C NO 4 209 CAL ABORT 4 143 6 98 CAL CORR ON OFF 4 143 6 99 CAL GEN 128 MHZ 4 294 6 100 6 101 CAL GEN COMB 4 294 6 100 CAL REFL OPEN 4 327 4 341 6 159 CAL REFL SHORT 4 327 4 341 6 159 CAL RESULTS 4 144 6 99 CAL TOTAL 4 143 6 98 CAL TRANS 4 322 4 336 6 159 CCDF ON OFF 4 202 6 91 6 94 CENTER 4 103 6 180 CENTER MKR FREQ 4 163...

Page 848: ...XT FM 4 330 6 220 6 221 EXT I Q 4 331 6 220 EXT SOURCE 4 344 EXT SRC ON OFF 4 345 6 223 EXTENSION 4 306 EXTERN 4 63 4 123 6 216 6 260 FAST ACP ON OFF 4 181 6 205 FFT FILTER MODE 4 119 FILE MANAGER 4 304 6 139 6 142 FILTER TYPE 4 23 4 116 6 156 FINAL AVERAGE 4 73 6 168 FINAL CISPR AV 4 73 FINAL CISPR RMS 4 74 FINAL MAX PEAK 4 73 6 168 FINAL MEAS 4 38 FINAL MEAS TIME 4 37 4 43 6 179 FINAL MIN PEAK 4...

Page 849: ... DB DOWN 4 157 6 53 6 54 6 55 NAME4 247 4 306 6 24 6 26 6 34 6 35 6 38 6 40 NB BB DISCR 4 36 NETWORK 4 333 4 334 NETWORK LOGIN 4 287 NEW 4 272 4 275 4 317 6 163 NEW FACTOR 4 271 NEW FOLDER 4 303 4 304 NEW LIMIT LINE4 246 6 24 6 25 6 26 6 34 6 35 6 37 NEW SEARCH 4 159 NEXT MIN 4 67 4 87 4 165 6 16 6 49 6 50 NEXT MIN LEFT 4 68 4 88 4 165 NEXT MIN RIGHT 4 68 4 88 4 165 NEXT PEAK4 66 4 86 4 163 6 15 6...

Page 850: ...VL ADJ AUTO MAN 4 271 REMOVE OPTION 4 289 RENAME 4 305 6 143 REPORT 4 313 RES BW 4 21 4 203 6 155 RES BW AUTO 4 114 6 156 RES BW MANUAL 4 112 6 155 RESTORE FIRMWARE 4 297 RESTORE STANDARDS 4 239 RF ATTEN AUTO 4 109 6 129 RF ATTEN MANUAL 4 16 4 81 4 109 6 129 RF INPUT 1 2 4 20 4 81 4 110 RF INPUT 50 Ohm 75 Ohm4 110 6 132 RF INPUT AC DC 4 19 4 81 4 109 RF POWER 6 260 RIGHT LIMIT 4 68 4 86 4 159 4 16...

Page 851: ...75 6 77 6 79 6 81 TIME LINE 1 2 4 251 TIME DATE 4 285 6 239 6 245 TIME DATE ON OFF 4 257 6 108 TINT 4 259 4 312 6 105 6 115 TOI 4 213 6 59 TOI MKR CALC SRCH 4 214 TRACE MATH 4 142 6 87 TRACE MATH OFF 4 142 6 87 TRACE POSITION 4 142 6 87 TRACK BW 4 105 6 73 TRACK ON OFF 4 105 6 73 TRACK THRESHOLD 4 105 6 73 TRACKING 4 319 TRANSDUCER 4 269 6 161 TRANSDUCER FACTOR 4 271 6 161 6 162 TRANSDUCER SET4 27...

Page 852: ...ds 5 15 System messages 4 292 T Test selftest 4 295 Test receiver 4 11 4 78 Text parameter 5 14 Third order intercept 4 211 Threshold line 4 68 4 86 4 164 signal tracking 4 105 Time 4 257 axis 4 106 input 4 285 line 4 251 Time domain analysis 4 53 Tint 4 259 Title for the active diagram 4 257 TOI 4 211 Trace 4 71 4 72 4 91 4 92 4 130 4 131 averaging 4 93 4 131 4 134 blank 4 72 4 93 4 133 clear wri...

Page 853: ...R S ESU 10 12 Operating Manual 1302 6163 12 03 View trace 4 133 V networks 4 265 W Weighting modes 4 31 White space 5 15 Z Zero span 4 106 Zoom 4 149 amplitude 4 72 4 133 x axis gate signal 4 127 ...

Page 854: ...Operating Manual 1302 6163 12 03 10 13 R S ESU ...

Page 855: ...R S ESU 10 14 Operating Manual 1302 6163 12 03 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for 1129.7246.03

Brand: Keithley Pages: 149

Brand: LSI Pages: 24

Brand: Aveo Engineering Pages: 16

Brand: York International Pages: 16

Brand: X-10 Pages: 12

Brand: Equinox Systems Pages: 8

Brand: Poulan Pro Pages: 17

Signature IVAC 710 Series

Brand: Alaris Medical Systems Pages: 140

AX2090-ND80 Series

Brand: Beckhoff Pages: 41

Brand: Delta Light Pages: 2

Brand: Nordson EFD Pages: 103

Brand: Hammer Strength Pages: 4

PERFAERATOR PA6685

Brand: Walker Pages: 28

Brand: Major Pages: 16

Brand: Omegawave Pages: 47

Brand: Gardol Pages: 336

Brand: J.P. SELECTA Pages: 4

Brand: WeGo Pages: 17

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands